TRUE/FALSE -> true/false in documentation
git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/trunk@18805 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775
This commit is contained in:
parent
4aa3178674
commit
cc81d32f2b
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Destroys the wxAcceleratorTable object.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the accelerator table is valid.
|
||||
Returns true if the accelerator table is valid.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxAcceleratorTable::operator $=$}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ equal (a fast test).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the accelerator tables were effectively equal, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the accelerator tables were effectively equal, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxAcceleratorTable::operator $!=$}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -201,6 +201,6 @@ unequal (a fast test).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the accelerator tables were unequal, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the accelerator tables were unequal, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ or a frame becomes inactivate resulting in all application frames being inactive
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxActivateEvent::wxActivateEvent}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxActivateEvent}{\param{WXTYPE }{eventType = 0}, \param{bool}{ active = TRUE}, \param{int }{id = 0}}
|
||||
\func{}{wxActivateEvent}{\param{WXTYPE }{eventType = 0}, \param{bool}{ active = true}, \param{int }{id = 0}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\member{bool}{m\_active}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the window or application was activated.
|
||||
true if the window or application was activated.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxActivateEvent::GetActive}\label{wxactivateeventgetactive}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetActive}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the application or window is being activated, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the application or window is being activated, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ This can be used for programming event loops, e.g.
|
||||
|
||||
This function is called before processing any event and allows the application
|
||||
to preempt the processing of some events. If this method returns $-1$ the event
|
||||
is processed normally, otherwise either {\tt TRUE} or {\tt FALSE} should be
|
||||
is processed normally, otherwise either {\tt true} or {\tt false} should be
|
||||
returned and the event processing stops immediately considering that the event
|
||||
had been already processed (for the former return value) or that it is not
|
||||
going to be processed at all (for the latter one).
|
||||
@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ calling \helpref{wxApp::OnInit}{wxapponinit}, but the application can reset it a
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetAuto3D}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if 3D control mode is on, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if 3D control mode is on, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ manner to refer to the application.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetExitFrameOnDelete}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the application will exit when the top-level window is deleted, FALSE
|
||||
Returns true if the application will exit when the top-level window is deleted, false
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
@ -159,8 +159,8 @@ function will find the first top-level window (frame or dialog) and return that.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetUseBestVisual}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the application will use the best visual on systems that support
|
||||
different visuals, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the application will use the best visual on systems that support
|
||||
different visuals, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ the top window.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Initialized}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the application has been initialized (i.e. if\rtfsp
|
||||
Returns true if the application has been initialized (i.e. if\rtfsp
|
||||
\helpref{wxApp::OnInit}{wxapponinit} has returned successfully). This can be useful for error
|
||||
message routines to determine which method of output is best for the
|
||||
current state of the program (some windowing systems may not like
|
||||
@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Returns 0 under X, and the wParam of the WM\_QUIT message under Windows.
|
||||
\func{void}{OnAssert}{\param{const wxChar }{*file}, \param{int }{line}, \param{const wxChar }{*cond}, \param{const wxChar }{*msg}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function is called when an assert failure occurs, i.e. the condition
|
||||
specified in \helpref{wxASSERT}{wxassert} macro evaluated to {\tt FALSE}.
|
||||
specified in \helpref{wxASSERT}{wxassert} macro evaluated to {\tt false}.
|
||||
It is only called in debug mode (when {\tt \_\_WXDEBUG\_\_} is defined) as
|
||||
asserts are not left in the release code at all.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -279,8 +279,8 @@ Called when command line parsing fails (i.e. an incorrect command line option
|
||||
was specified by the user). The default behaviour is to show the program usage
|
||||
text and abort the program.
|
||||
|
||||
Return {\tt TRUE} to continue normal execution or {\tt FALSE} to return
|
||||
{\tt FALSE} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
|
||||
Return {\tt true} to continue normal execution or {\tt false} to return
|
||||
{\tt false} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -293,8 +293,8 @@ Return {\tt TRUE} to continue normal execution or {\tt FALSE} to return
|
||||
Called when the help option ({\tt --help}) was specified on the command line.
|
||||
The default behaviour is to show the program usage text and abort the program.
|
||||
|
||||
Return {\tt TRUE} to continue normal execution or {\tt FALSE} to return
|
||||
{\tt FALSE} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
|
||||
Return {\tt true} to continue normal execution or {\tt false} to return
|
||||
{\tt false} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -311,8 +311,8 @@ set from the command line.
|
||||
Don't forget to call the base class version unless you want to suppress
|
||||
processing of the standard command line options.
|
||||
|
||||
Return {\tt TRUE} to continue normal execution or {\tt FALSE} to return
|
||||
{\tt FALSE} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
|
||||
Return {\tt true} to continue normal execution or {\tt false} to return
|
||||
{\tt false} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ work and, in fact, probably won't.
|
||||
%%
|
||||
%%Use the EVT\_END\_SESSION event table macro to handle query end session events.
|
||||
%%
|
||||
%%The default handler calls \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} with a TRUE argument
|
||||
%%The default handler calls \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} with a true argument
|
||||
%%(forcing the application to close itself silently).
|
||||
%%
|
||||
%%\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Notice that if you want to to use the command line processing provided by
|
||||
wxWindows you have to call the base class version in the derived class
|
||||
OnInit().
|
||||
|
||||
Return TRUE to continue processing, FALSE to exit the application.
|
||||
Return true to continue processing, false to exit the application.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxApp::OnInitCmdLine}\label{wxapponinitcmdline}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ This is an event handler function called when the operating system or GUI sessio
|
||||
about to close down. Typically, an application will try to save unsaved documents
|
||||
at this point.
|
||||
|
||||
If \helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto} returns TRUE, the application
|
||||
If \helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto} returns true, the application
|
||||
is allowed to veto the shutdown by calling \helpref{wxCloseEvent::Veto}{wxcloseeventveto}.
|
||||
The application might veto the shutdown after prompting for documents to be saved, and the
|
||||
user has cancelled the save.
|
||||
@ -424,12 +424,12 @@ user has cancelled the save.
|
||||
Use the EVT\_QUERY\_END\_SESSION event table macro to handle query end session events.
|
||||
|
||||
You should check whether the application is forcing the deletion of the window
|
||||
using \helpref{wxCloseEvent::GetForce}{wxcloseeventgetforce}. If this is TRUE,
|
||||
using \helpref{wxCloseEvent::GetForce}{wxcloseeventgetforce}. If this is true,
|
||||
destroy the window using \helpref{wxWindow::Destroy}{wxwindowdestroy}.
|
||||
If not, it is up to you whether you respond by destroying the window.
|
||||
|
||||
The default handler calls \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} on the top-level window,
|
||||
and vetoes the shutdown if Close returns FALSE. This will be sufficient for many applications.
|
||||
and vetoes the shutdown if Close returns false. This will be sufficient for many applications.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -450,8 +450,8 @@ Under Windows, OnQueryEndSession is called in response to the WM\_QUERYENDSESSIO
|
||||
|
||||
Windows-only function for processing a message. This function
|
||||
is called from the main message loop, checking for windows that
|
||||
may wish to process it. The function returns TRUE if the message
|
||||
was processed, FALSE otherwise. If you use wxWindows with another class
|
||||
may wish to process it. The function returns true if the message
|
||||
was processed, false otherwise. If you use wxWindows with another class
|
||||
library with its own message loop, you should make sure that this
|
||||
function is called to allow wxWindows to receive messages. For example,
|
||||
to allow co-existence with the Microsoft Foundation Classes, override
|
||||
@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ the PreTranslateMessage function:
|
||||
BOOL CTheApp::PreTranslateMessage(MSG *msg)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (wxTheApp && wxTheApp->ProcessMessage((WXMSW *)msg))
|
||||
return TRUE;
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
else
|
||||
return CWinApp::PreTranslateMessage(msg);
|
||||
}
|
||||
@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ BOOL CTheApp::PreTranslateMessage(MSG *msg)
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Pending}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if unprocessed events are in the window system event queue.
|
||||
Returns true if unprocessed events are in the window system event queue.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ Sends idle events to a window and its children.
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
These functions poll the top-level windows, and their children, for idle event processing.
|
||||
If TRUE is returned, more OnIdle processing is requested by one or more window.
|
||||
If true is returned, more OnIdle processing is requested by one or more window.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -519,8 +519,8 @@ Switches automatic 3D controls on or off.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{auto3D}{If TRUE, all controls will be created with 3D appearances unless
|
||||
overridden for a control or dialog. The default is TRUE}
|
||||
\docparam{auto3D}{If true, all controls will be created with 3D appearances unless
|
||||
overridden for a control or dialog. The default is true}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -550,8 +550,8 @@ top-level frame is deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{flag}{If TRUE (the default), the application will exit when the top-level frame is
|
||||
deleted. If FALSE, the application will continue to run.}
|
||||
\docparam{flag}{If true (the default), the application will exit when the top-level frame is
|
||||
deleted. If false, the application will continue to run.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -606,11 +606,11 @@ This function currently only has effect under GTK.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{flag}{If TRUE, the app will use the best visual.}
|
||||
\docparam{flag}{If true, the app will use the best visual.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxApp::Yield}\label{wxappyield}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Yield}{\param{bool}{ onlyIfNeeded = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{Yield}{\param{bool}{ onlyIfNeeded = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Yields control to pending messages in the windowing system. This can be useful, for example, when a
|
||||
time-consuming process writes to a text window. Without an occasional
|
||||
@ -631,6 +631,6 @@ iteration), call \helpref{wxLog::FlushActive}{wxlogflushactive}.
|
||||
|
||||
Calling Yield() recursively is normally an error and an assert failure is
|
||||
raised in debug build if such situation is detected. However if the the
|
||||
{\it onlyIfNeeded} parameter is {\tt TRUE}, the method will just silently
|
||||
return {\tt FALSE} instead.
|
||||
{\it onlyIfNeeded} parameter is {\tt true}, the method will just silently
|
||||
return {\tt false} instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ Return the number of items in the array.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArray::Index}\label{wxarrayindex}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{Index}{\param{T\& }{item}, \param{bool }{searchFromEnd = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{int}{Index}{\param{T\& }{item}, \param{bool }{searchFromEnd = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{Index}{\param{T\& }{item}}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ between the overloaded versions of this function.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsEmpty}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the array is empty, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the array is empty, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArray::Item}\label{wxarrayitem}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -84,14 +84,14 @@ Assignment operator.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxArrayString\&}{ array}}
|
||||
|
||||
Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns TRUE only if the arrays have
|
||||
Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns true only if the arrays have
|
||||
the same number of elements and the same strings in the same order.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::operator!=}\label{wxarraystringoperatornotequal}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxArrayString\&}{ array}}
|
||||
|
||||
Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns TRUE if the arrays have
|
||||
Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns true if the arrays have
|
||||
different number of elements or if the elements don't match pairwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::operator[]}\label{wxarraystringoperatorindex}
|
||||
@ -163,10 +163,10 @@ Returns the number of items in the array.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::Index}\label{wxarraystringindex}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{Index}{\param{const char *}{ sz}, \param{bool}{ bCase = TRUE}, \param{bool}{ bFromEnd = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{int}{Index}{\param{const char *}{ sz}, \param{bool}{ bCase = true}, \param{bool}{ bFromEnd = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Search the element in the array, starting from the beginning if
|
||||
{\it bFromEnd} is FALSE or from end otherwise. If {\it bCase}, comparison is
|
||||
{\it bFromEnd} is false or from end otherwise. If {\it bCase}, comparison is
|
||||
case sensitive (default), otherwise the case is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
This function uses linear search for wxArrayString and binary search for
|
||||
@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ could break the order of items and, for example, subsequent calls to
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{IsEmpty}{}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the array is empty, FALSE otherwise. This function returns the
|
||||
Returns true if the array is empty, false otherwise. This function returns the
|
||||
same result as {\it GetCount() == 0} but is probably easier to read.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::Item}\label{wxarraystringitem}
|
||||
@ -243,10 +243,10 @@ See also: \helpref{Alloc}{wxarraystringalloc}, \helpref{Dynamic array memory man
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::Sort}\label{wxarraystringsort}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Sort}{\param{bool}{ reverseOrder = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{Sort}{\param{bool}{ reverseOrder = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sorts the array in alphabetical order or in reverse alphabetical order if
|
||||
{\it reverseOrder} is TRUE.
|
||||
{\it reverseOrder} is true.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf Warning:} this function should not be used with sorted array because it
|
||||
could break the order of items and, for example, subsequent calls to
|
||||
|
@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ gets the current Excel instance, and if it exists, makes the active cell bold.
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
wxAutomationObject excelObject;
|
||||
if (excelObject.GetInstance("Excel.Application"))
|
||||
excelObject.PutProperty("ActiveCell.Font.Bold", TRUE);
|
||||
excelObject.PutProperty("ActiveCell.Font.Bold", true);
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -78,8 +78,8 @@ needing to call GetProperty several times using several temporary objects. For e
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{CreateInstance}{\param{const wxString\&}{ classId}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a new object based on the class id, returning TRUE if the object was successfully created,
|
||||
or FALSE if not.
|
||||
Creates a new object based on the class id, returning true if the object was successfully created,
|
||||
or false if not.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxAutomationObject::GetDispatchPtr}\label{wxautomationobjectgetdispatchptr}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Gets the IDispatch pointer.
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetInstance}{\param{const wxString\&}{ classId}}
|
||||
|
||||
Retrieves the current object associated with a class id, and attaches the IDispatch pointer
|
||||
to this object. Returns TRUE if a pointer was successfully retrieved, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
to this object. Returns true if a pointer was successfully retrieved, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this cannot cope with two instances of a given OLE object being active simultaneously,
|
||||
such as two copies of Excel running. Which object is referenced cannot currently be specified.
|
||||
@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ DISPATCH\_METHOD.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation was successful, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the operation was successful, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ of possible values.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the call succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the call succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ In addition, wxBitmap can read all formats that \helpref{wxImage}{wximage} can
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ if one has been created by using the \helpref{GetPalette}{wxbitmapgetpalette} me
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if bitmap data is present.
|
||||
Returns true if bitmap data is present.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxBitmap::RemoveHandler}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ is not deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the handler was found and removed, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the handler was found and removed, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ In addition, wxBitmap can save all formats that \helpref{wxImage}{wximage} can
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ equal (a fast test).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the bitmaps were effectively equal, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the bitmaps were effectively equal, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxBitmap::operator $!=$}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -611,5 +611,5 @@ unequal (a fast test).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the bitmaps were unequal, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the bitmaps were unequal, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ of possible values.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the call succeeded, FALSE otherwise (the default).
|
||||
true if the call succeeded, false otherwise (the default).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxBitmapHandler::GetName}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ The meaning of {\it name} is determined by the {\it type} parameter.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Saves a bitmap in the named file.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ data using the reference counting, are not affected.
|
||||
\func{}{wxBrush}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Default constructor. The brush will be uninitialised, and \helpref{wxBrush::Ok}{wxbrushok} will
|
||||
return FALSE.
|
||||
return false.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxBrush}{\param{const wxColour\&}{ colour}, \param{int}{ style}}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Returns a reference to the brush colour.
|
||||
\constfunc{wxBitmap *}{GetStipple}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets a pointer to the stipple bitmap. If the brush does not have a wxSTIPPLE style,
|
||||
this bitmap may be non-NULL but uninitialised (\helpref{wxBitmap::Ok}{wxbitmapok} returns FALSE).
|
||||
this bitmap may be non-NULL but uninitialised (\helpref{wxBitmap::Ok}{wxbitmapok} returns false).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Returns the brush style, one of:
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the brush is initialised. It will return FALSE if the default
|
||||
Returns true if the brush is initialised. It will return false if the default
|
||||
constructor has been used (for example, the brush is a member of a class, or
|
||||
NULL has been assigned to it).
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Gets the currently selected date.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::EnableYearChange}\label{wxcalendarctrlenableyearchange}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableYearChange}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableYearChange}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function should be used instead of changing {\tt wxCAL\_NO\_YEAR\_CHANGE}
|
||||
style bit directly. It allows or disallows the user to change the year
|
||||
@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ interactively.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::EnableMonthChange}\label{wxcalendarctrlenablemonthchange}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableMonthChange}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableMonthChange}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function should be used instead of changing
|
||||
{\tt wxCAL\_NO\_MONTH\_CHANGE} style bit. It allows or disallows the user to
|
||||
@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ year can not be changed neither.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::EnableHolidayDisplay}\label{wxcalendarctrlenableholidaydisplay}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableHolidayDisplay}{\param{bool }{display = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableHolidayDisplay}{\param{bool }{display = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function should be used instead of changing {\tt wxCAL\_SHOW\_HOLIDAYS}
|
||||
style bit directly. It enables or disables the special highlighting of the
|
||||
@ -362,37 +362,37 @@ Display the date with this attribute as a holiday.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasTextColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this item has a non default text foreground colour.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this item has a non default text foreground colour.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasBackgroundColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasbackgroundcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasBackgroundColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default text background colour.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this attribute specifies a non default text background colour.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasBorderColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasbordercolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasBorderColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default border colour.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this attribute specifies a non default border colour.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasFont}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasfont}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasFont}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default font.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this attribute specifies a non default font.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasBorder}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasborder}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasBorder}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default (i.e. any) border.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this attribute specifies a non default (i.e. any) border.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::IsHoliday}\label{wxcalendardateattrisholiday}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsHoliday}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies that this item should be
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this attribute specifies that this item should be
|
||||
displayed as a holiday.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::GetTextColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrgettextcolour}
|
||||
|
@ -108,21 +108,21 @@ Get the window the caret is associated with.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Hide}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Same as \helpref{wxCaret::Show(FALSE)}{wxcaretshow}.
|
||||
Same as \helpref{wxCaret::Show(false)}{wxcaretshow}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::IsOk}\label{wxcaretisok}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the caret was created successfully.
|
||||
Returns true if the caret was created successfully.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::IsVisible}\label{wxcaretisvisible}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsVisible}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the caret is visible and FALSE if it is permanently
|
||||
Returns true if the caret is visible and false if it is permanently
|
||||
hidden (if it is is blinking and not shown currently but will be after the
|
||||
next blink, this method still returns TRUE).
|
||||
next blink, this method still returns true).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::Move}\label{wxcaretmove}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Changes the size of the caret.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::Show}\label{wxcaretshow}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Show}{\param{bool }{show = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{Show}{\param{bool }{show = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Shows or hides the caret. Notice that if the caret was hidden $N$ times, it
|
||||
must be shown $N$ times as well to reappear on the screen.
|
||||
|
@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Gets the state of the checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if it is checked, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if it is checked, {\tt false} otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCheckBox::IsChecked}\label{wxcheckboxischecked}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Returns {\tt TRUE} if it is checked, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
This is just a maybe more readable synonym for
|
||||
\helpref{GetValue}{wxcheckboxgetvalue}: just as the latter, it returns
|
||||
{\tt TRUE} if the checkbox is checked and {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
|
||||
{\tt true} if the checkbox is checked and {\tt false} otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCheckBox::SetValue}\label{wxcheckboxsetvalue}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -112,5 +112,5 @@ wxEVT\_COMMAND\_CHECKBOX\_CLICKED event to get emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{state}{If {\tt TRUE}, the check is on, otherwise it is off.}
|
||||
\docparam{state}{If {\tt true}, the check is on, otherwise it is off.}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Destructor, destroying the list box.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCheckListBox::Check}\label{wxchecklistboxcheck}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Check}{\param{int }{item}, \param{bool}{ check = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{Check}{\param{int }{item}, \param{bool}{ check = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Checks the given item. Note that calling this method doesn't result in
|
||||
wxEVT\_COMMAND\_CHECKLISTBOX\_TOGGLE being emitted.
|
||||
@ -96,13 +96,13 @@ wxEVT\_COMMAND\_CHECKLISTBOX\_TOGGLE being emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{item}{Index of item to check.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{check}{TRUE if the item is to be checked, FALSE otherwise.}
|
||||
\docparam{check}{true if the item is to be checked, false otherwise.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCheckListBox::IsChecked}\label{wxchecklistboxischecked}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsChecked}{\param{int}{ item}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the given item is checked, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the given item is checked, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -74,6 +74,6 @@ of IsKindOf. Called in base wxWindows library initialization.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsKindOf}{\param{wxClassInfo* }{info}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if this class is a kind of (inherits from) the given class.
|
||||
Returns true if this class is a kind of (inherits from) the given class.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ To use the clipboard, you call member functions of the global {\bf wxTheClipboar
|
||||
|
||||
See also the \helpref{wxDataObject overview}{wxdataobjectoverview} for further information.
|
||||
|
||||
Call \helpref{wxClipboard::Open}{wxclipboardopen} to get ownership of the clipboard. If this operation returns TRUE, you
|
||||
Call \helpref{wxClipboard::Open}{wxclipboardopen} to get ownership of the clipboard. If this operation returns true, you
|
||||
now own the clipboard. Call \helpref{wxClipboard::SetData}{wxclipboardsetdata} to put data
|
||||
on the clipboard, or \helpref{wxClipboard::GetData}{wxclipboardgetdata} to
|
||||
retrieve data from the clipboard. Call \helpref{wxClipboard::Close}{wxclipboardclose} to close
|
||||
@ -97,26 +97,26 @@ Call this function to close the clipboard, having opened it with \helpref{wxClip
|
||||
Flushes the clipboard: this means that the data which is currently on
|
||||
clipboard will stay available even after the application exits (possibly
|
||||
eating memory), otherwise the clipboard will be emptied on exit.
|
||||
Returns FALSE if the operation is unsuccesful for any reason.
|
||||
Returns false if the operation is unsuccesful for any reason.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxClipboard::GetData}\label{wxclipboardgetdata}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetData}{\param{wxDataObject\&}{ data}}
|
||||
|
||||
Call this function to fill {\it data} with data on the clipboard, if available in the required
|
||||
format. Returns TRUE on success.
|
||||
format. Returns true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxClipboard::IsOpened}\label{wxclipboardisopened}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOpened}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the clipboard has been opened.
|
||||
Returns true if the clipboard has been opened.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxClipboard::IsSupported}\label{wxclipboardissupported}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsSupported}{\param{const wxDataFormat\&}{ format}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the format of the given data object is available on the clipboard.
|
||||
Returns true if the format of the given data object is available on the clipboard.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxClipboard::Open}\label{wxclipboardopen}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ and \helpref{wxClipboard::GetData}{wxclipboardgetdata}.
|
||||
Call \helpref{wxClipboard::Close}{wxclipboardclose} when you have finished with the clipboard. You
|
||||
should keep the clipboard open for only a very short time.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE on success. This should be tested (as in the sample shown above).
|
||||
Returns true on success. This should be tested (as in the sample shown above).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxClipboard::SetData}\label{wxclipboardsetdata}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -147,10 +147,10 @@ the data explicitly.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxClipboard::UsePrimarySelection}\label{wxclipboarduseprimary}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{UsePrimarySelection}{\param{bool}{ primary = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{UsePrimarySelection}{\param{bool}{ primary = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
On platforms supporting it (currently only GTK), selects the so called
|
||||
PRIMARY SELECTION as the clipboard as opposed to the normal clipboard,
|
||||
if {\it primary} is TRUE.
|
||||
if {\it primary} is true.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -8,13 +8,13 @@ also be invoked by the application itself programmatically, for example by
|
||||
calling the \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} function.
|
||||
|
||||
You should check whether the application is forcing the deletion of the window
|
||||
using \helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto}. If this is {\tt FALSE},
|
||||
using \helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto}. If this is {\tt false},
|
||||
you {\it must} destroy the window using \helpref{wxWindow::Destroy}{wxwindowdestroy}.
|
||||
If the return value is TRUE, it is up to you whether you respond by destroying the window.
|
||||
If the return value is true, it is up to you whether you respond by destroying the window.
|
||||
|
||||
If you don't destroy the window, you should call \helpref{wxCloseEvent::Veto}{wxcloseeventveto} to
|
||||
let the calling code know that you did not destroy the window. This allows the \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} function
|
||||
to return {\tt TRUE} or {\tt FALSE} depending on whether the close instruction was honoured or not.
|
||||
to return {\tt true} or {\tt false} depending on whether the close instruction was honoured or not.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CanVeto}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if you can veto a system shutdown or a window close event.
|
||||
Returns true if you can veto a system shutdown or a window close event.
|
||||
Vetoing a window close event is not possible if the calling code wishes to
|
||||
force the application to exit, and so this function must be called to check this.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -67,19 +67,19 @@ force the application to exit, and so this function must be called to check this
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetLoggingOff}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the user is logging off.
|
||||
Returns true if the user is logging off.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCloseEvent::GetSessionEnding}\label{wxcloseeventgetsessionending}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetSessionEnding}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the session is ending.
|
||||
Returns true if the session is ending.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCloseEvent::GetForce}\label{wxcloseeventgetforce}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetForce}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the application wishes to force the window to close.
|
||||
Returns true if the application wishes to force the window to close.
|
||||
This will shortly be obsolete, replaced by CanVeto.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCloseEvent::SetCanVeto}\label{wxcloseeventsetcanveto}
|
||||
@ -102,12 +102,12 @@ Sets the 'logging off' flag.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCloseEvent::Veto}\label{wxcloseeventveto}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Veto}{\param{bool}{ veto = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{Veto}{\param{bool}{ veto = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Call this from your event handler to veto a system shutdown or to signal
|
||||
to the calling application that a window close did not happen.
|
||||
|
||||
You can only veto a shutdown if \helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto} returns
|
||||
TRUE.
|
||||
true.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -113,8 +113,8 @@ Contains a string corresponding to a listbox or choice selection.
|
||||
\member{long}{m\_extraLong}
|
||||
|
||||
Extra information. If the event comes from a listbox selection, it is
|
||||
a boolean determining whether the event was a selection (TRUE) or a
|
||||
deselection (FALSE). A listbox deselection only occurs for
|
||||
a boolean determining whether the event was a selection (true) or a
|
||||
deselection (false). A listbox deselection only occurs for
|
||||
multiple-selection boxes, and in this case the index and string values
|
||||
are indeterminate and the listbox must be examined by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ a deselection).
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsChecked}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
This method can be used with checkbox and menu events: for the checkboxes, the
|
||||
method returns {\tt TRUE} for a selection event and {\tt FALSE} for a
|
||||
method returns {\tt true} for a selection event and {\tt false} for a
|
||||
deselection one. For the menu events, this method indicates if the menu item
|
||||
just has become checked or unchecked (and thus only makes sense for checkable
|
||||
menu items).
|
||||
@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ menu items).
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsSelection}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
For a listbox or choice event, returns TRUE if it is a selection, FALSE if it
|
||||
For a listbox or choice event, returns true if it is a selection, false if it
|
||||
is a deselection.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommandEvent::SetClientData}
|
||||
|
@ -227,8 +227,8 @@ For a simple switch, you will simply call
|
||||
\helpref{Found}{wxcmdlineparserfoundswitch} to determine if the switch was given
|
||||
or not, for an option or a parameter, you will call a version of {\tt Found()}
|
||||
which also returns the associated value in the provided variable. All
|
||||
{\tt Found()} functions return TRUE if the switch or option were found in the
|
||||
command line or FALSE if they were not specified.
|
||||
{\tt Found()} functions return true if the switch or option were found in the
|
||||
command line or false if they were not specified.
|
||||
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%% Methods in alphabetic order %%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
\helponly{\insertatlevel{2}{
|
||||
@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ start. Default is {\tt "-"} for Unix, {\tt "-/"} for Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::EnableLongOptions}\label{wxcmdlineparserenablelongoptions}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableLongOptions}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableLongOptions}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Enable or disable support for the long options.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -341,13 +341,13 @@ them.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{DisableLongOptions}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Identical to \helpref{EnableLongOptions(FALSE)}{wxcmdlineparserenablelongoptions}.
|
||||
Identical to \helpref{EnableLongOptions(false)}{wxcmdlineparserenablelongoptions}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::AreLongOptionsEnabled}\label{wxcmdlineparserarelongoptionsenabled}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{AreLongOptionsEnabled}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if long options are enabled, otherwise FALSE.
|
||||
Returns true if long options are enabled, otherwise false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Add a parameter of the given {\it type} to the command line description.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Parse}\label{wxcmdlineparserparse}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{Parse}{\param{bool }{giveUsage = {\tt TRUE}}}
|
||||
\func{int}{Parse}{\param{bool }{giveUsage = {\tt true}}}
|
||||
|
||||
Parse the command line, return $0$ if ok, $-1$ if {\tt "-h"} or {\tt "--help"}
|
||||
option was encountered and the help message was given or a positive value if a
|
||||
@ -423,9 +423,9 @@ syntax error occured.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{giveUsage}{If {\tt TRUE} (default), the usage message is given if a
|
||||
\docparam{giveUsage}{If {\tt true} (default), the usage message is given if a
|
||||
syntax error was encountered while parsing the command line or if help was
|
||||
requested. If {\tt FALSE}, only error messages about possible syntax errors
|
||||
requested. If {\tt false}, only error messages about possible syntax errors
|
||||
are given, use \helpref{Usage}{wxcmdlineparserusage} to show the usage message
|
||||
from the caller if needed.}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -445,27 +445,27 @@ will not be helpful to the user unless the descriptions were indeed specified.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the given switch was found, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the given switch was found, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Found}\label{wxcmdlineparserfoundstringoption}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{wxString* }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if an option taking a string value was found and stores the
|
||||
Returns true if an option taking a string value was found and stores the
|
||||
value in the provided pointer (which should not be NULL).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Found}\label{wxcmdlineparserfoundintoption}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{long* }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if an option taking an integer value was found and stores
|
||||
Returns true if an option taking an integer value was found and stores
|
||||
the value in the provided pointer (which should not be NULL).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Found}\label{wxcmdlineparserfounddateoption}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{wxDateTime* }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if an option taking a date value was found and stores the
|
||||
Returns true if an option taking a date value was found and stores the
|
||||
value in the provided pointer (which should not be NULL).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::GetParamCount}\label{wxcmdlineparsergetparamcount}
|
||||
|
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ Destructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{CanUndo}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the currently-active command can be undone, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the currently-active command can be undone, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommandProcessor::ClearCommands}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Sets the string that will be appended to the Undo menu item.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommandProcessor::Submit}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{Submit}{\param{wxCommand *}{command}, \param{bool}{ storeIt = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{Submit}{\param{wxCommand *}{command}, \param{bool}{ storeIt = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Submits a new command to the command processor. The command processor
|
||||
calls wxCommand::Do to execute the command; if it succeeds, the command
|
||||
|
@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Returns the green intensity.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the colour object is valid (the colour has been initialised with RGB values).
|
||||
Returns true if the colour object is valid (the colour has been initialised with RGB values).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxColour::Red}\label{wxcolourred}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ This class holds a variety of information related to colour dialogs.
|
||||
\func{}{wxColourData}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor. Initializes the custom colours to white, the {\it data colour} setting
|
||||
to black, and the {\it choose full} setting to TRUE.
|
||||
to black, and the {\it choose full} setting to true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxColourData::\destruct{wxColourData}}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Destructor.
|
||||
Under Windows, determines whether the Windows colour dialog will display the full dialog
|
||||
with custom colour selection controls. Has no meaning under other platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
The default value is TRUE.
|
||||
The default value is true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxColourData::GetColour}\label{wxcolourdatagetcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ The default custom colours are all white.
|
||||
Under Windows, tells the Windows colour dialog to display the full dialog
|
||||
with custom colour selection controls. Under other platforms, has no effect.
|
||||
|
||||
The default value is TRUE.
|
||||
The default value is true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxColourData::SetColour}\label{wxcolourdatasetcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ change the data or view.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommand::wxCommand}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCommand}{\param{bool}{ canUndo = FALSE}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = NULL}}
|
||||
\func{}{wxCommand}{\param{bool}{ canUndo = false}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor. wxCommand is an abstract class, so you will need to derive
|
||||
a new class and call this constructor from your own constructor.
|
||||
@ -43,15 +43,15 @@ Destructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CanUndo}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the command can be undone, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the command can be undone, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommand::Do}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Do}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Override this member function to execute the appropriate action when called.
|
||||
Return TRUE to indicate that the action has taken place, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returning FALSE will indicate to the command processor that the action is
|
||||
Return true to indicate that the action has taken place, false otherwise.
|
||||
Returning false will indicate to the command processor that the action is
|
||||
not undoable and should not be added to the command history.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommand::GetName}
|
||||
@ -65,8 +65,8 @@ Returns the command name.
|
||||
\func{bool}{Undo}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Override this member function to un-execute a previous Do.
|
||||
Return TRUE to indicate that the action has taken place, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returning FALSE will indicate to the command processor that the action is
|
||||
Return true to indicate that the action has taken place, false otherwise.
|
||||
Returning false will indicate to the command processor that the action is
|
||||
not redoable and no change should be made to the command history.
|
||||
|
||||
How you implement this command is totally application dependent, but typical
|
||||
|
@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ the thread before calling this method.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
The second form returns {\tt TRUE} if the condition has been signalled, or
|
||||
{\tt FALSE} if it returned because the timeout has elapsed.
|
||||
The second form returns {\tt true} if the condition has been signalled, or
|
||||
{\tt false} if it returned because the timeout has elapsed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ regardless of the platform (i.e. it is {\bf not} '$\backslash\backslash$' under
|
||||
\membersection{Enumeration}
|
||||
|
||||
The functions in this section allow to enumerate all entries and groups in the
|
||||
config file. All functions here return FALSE when there are no more items.
|
||||
config file. All functions here return false when there are no more items.
|
||||
|
||||
You must pass the same index to GetNext and GetFirst (don't modify it).
|
||||
Please note that it is {\bf not} the index of the current item (you will have
|
||||
@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ arbitrary path (either relative or absolute), not just the key name.
|
||||
\membersection{Rename entries/groups}
|
||||
|
||||
The functions in this section allow to rename entries or subgroups of the
|
||||
current group. They will return FALSE on error. typically because either the
|
||||
current group. They will return false on error. typically because either the
|
||||
entry/group with the original name doesn't exist, because the entry/group with
|
||||
the new name already exists or because the function is not supported in this
|
||||
wxConfig implementation.
|
||||
@ -315,8 +315,8 @@ the call to {\tt config->Read("UserData")} will return something like
|
||||
Although this feature is very useful, it may be annoying if you read a value
|
||||
which containts '\$' or '\%' symbols (\% is used for environment variables
|
||||
expansion under Windows) which are not used for environment variable
|
||||
expansion. In this situation you may call SetExpandEnvVars(FALSE) just before
|
||||
reading this value and SetExpandEnvVars(TRUE) just after. Another solution
|
||||
expansion. In this situation you may call SetExpandEnvVars(false) just before
|
||||
reading this value and SetExpandEnvVars(true) just after. Another solution
|
||||
would be to prefix the offending symbols with a backslash.
|
||||
|
||||
The following functions control this option:
|
||||
@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ for use by desinstallation routine.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::DeleteEntry}\label{wxconfigbasedeleteentry}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{DeleteEntry}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool}{ bDeleteGroupIfEmpty = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{DeleteEntry}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool}{ bDeleteGroupIfEmpty = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Deletes the specified entry and the group it belongs to if it was the last key
|
||||
in it and the second parameter is true.
|
||||
@ -434,21 +434,21 @@ Delete the group (with all subgroups)
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Exists}{\param{wxString\& }{strName}}
|
||||
|
||||
returns TRUE if either a group or an entry with a given name exists
|
||||
returns true if either a group or an entry with a given name exists
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::Flush}\label{wxconfigbaseflush}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Flush}{\param{bool }{bCurrentOnly = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{Flush}{\param{bool }{bCurrentOnly = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
permanently writes all changes (otherwise, they're only written from object's
|
||||
destructor)
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::Get}\label{wxconfigbaseget}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{static wxConfigBase *}{Get}{\param{bool }{CreateOnDemand = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{static wxConfigBase *}{Get}{\param{bool }{CreateOnDemand = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Get the current config object. If there is no current object and
|
||||
{\it CreateOnDemand} is TRUE, creates one
|
||||
{\it CreateOnDemand} is true, creates one
|
||||
(using {\it Create}) unless DontCreateOnDemand was called previously.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::GetAppName}\label{wxconfigbasegetappname}
|
||||
@ -534,11 +534,11 @@ and returns a 3-element list {\tt ( continue, str, index )}.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::GetNumberOfEntries}\label{wxconfigbasegetnumberofentries}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{uint }{GetNumberOfEntries}{\param{bool }{bRecursive = FALSE}}
|
||||
\constfunc{uint }{GetNumberOfEntries}{\param{bool }{bRecursive = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::GetNumberOfGroups}\label{wxconfigbasegetnumberofgroups}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{uint}{GetNumberOfGroups}{\param{bool }{bRecursive = FALSE}}
|
||||
\constfunc{uint}{GetNumberOfGroups}{\param{bool }{bRecursive = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Get number of entries/subgroups in the current group, with or without its
|
||||
subgroups.
|
||||
@ -559,31 +559,31 @@ Returns the vendor name.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasEntry}{\param{wxString\& }{strName}}
|
||||
|
||||
returns TRUE if the entry by this name exists
|
||||
returns true if the entry by this name exists
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::HasGroup}\label{wxconfigbasehasgroup}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasGroup}{\param{const wxString\& }{strName}}
|
||||
|
||||
returns TRUE if the group by this name exists
|
||||
returns true if the group by this name exists
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::IsExpandingEnvVars}\label{wxconfigbaseisexpandingenvvars}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsExpandingEnvVars}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if we are expanding environment variables in key values.
|
||||
Returns true if we are expanding environment variables in key values.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::IsRecordingDefaults}\label{wxconfigbaseisrecordingdefaults}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsRecordingDefaults}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if we are writing defaults back to the config file.
|
||||
Returns true if we are writing defaults back to the config file.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::Read}\label{wxconfigbaseread}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{wxString*}{ str}}
|
||||
|
||||
Read a string from the key, returning TRUE if the value was read. If the key
|
||||
Read a string from the key, returning true if the value was read. If the key
|
||||
was not found, {\it str} is not changed.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{wxString*}{ str}, \param{const wxString\& }{defaultVal}}
|
||||
@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ was not found, {\it str} is not changed.
|
||||
Read a string from the key. The default value is returned if the key was not
|
||||
found.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if value was really read, FALSE if the default was used.
|
||||
Returns true if value was really read, false if the default was used.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxString}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{const
|
||||
wxString\& }{defaultVal}}
|
||||
@ -600,13 +600,13 @@ Another version of {\it Read()}, returning the string value directly.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{long*}{ l}}
|
||||
|
||||
Reads a long value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
Reads a long value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
not found, {\it l} is not changed.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{long*}{ l},
|
||||
\param{long}{ defaultVal}}
|
||||
|
||||
Reads a long value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
Reads a long value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
not found, {\it defaultVal} is used instead.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{long }{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{long}{ defaultVal}}
|
||||
@ -633,24 +633,24 @@ won't work because the call is ambiguous: compiler can not choose between two
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{double*}{ d}}
|
||||
|
||||
Reads a double value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
Reads a double value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
not found, {\it d} is not changed.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{double*}{ d},
|
||||
\param{double}{ defaultVal}}
|
||||
|
||||
Reads a double value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
Reads a double value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
not found, {\it defaultVal} is used instead.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool*}{ b}}
|
||||
|
||||
Reads a bool value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
Reads a bool value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
not found, {\it b} is not changed.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool*}{ d},
|
||||
\param{bool}{ defaultVal}}
|
||||
|
||||
Reads a bool value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
Reads a bool value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
not found, {\it defaultVal} is used instead.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{In place of a single overloaded method name, wxPython
|
||||
@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ Renames an entry in the current group. The entries names (both the old and
|
||||
the new one) shouldn't contain backslashes, i.e. only simple names and not
|
||||
arbitrary paths are accepted by this function.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE if the {\it oldName} doesn't exist or if {\it newName} already
|
||||
Returns false if the {\it oldName} doesn't exist or if {\it newName} already
|
||||
exists.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::RenameGroup}\label{wxconfigbaserenamegroup}
|
||||
@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ Renames a subgroup of the current group. The subgroup names (both the old and
|
||||
the new one) shouldn't contain backslashes, i.e. only simple names and not
|
||||
arbitrary paths are accepted by this function.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE if the {\it oldName} doesn't exist or if {\it newName} already
|
||||
Returns false if the {\it oldName} doesn't exist or if {\it newName} already
|
||||
exists.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::Set}\label{wxconfigbaseset}
|
||||
@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ current object (both the parameter and returned value may be NULL)
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::SetExpandEnvVars}\label{wxconfigbasesetexpandenvvars}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetExpandEnvVars }{\param{bool }{bDoIt = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetExpandEnvVars }{\param{bool }{bDoIt = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Determine whether we wish to expand environment variables in key values.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ exist it is created.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::SetRecordDefaults}\label{wxconfigbasesetrecorddefaults}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetRecordDefaults}{\param{bool }{bDoIt = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetRecordDefaults}{\param{bool }{bDoIt = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets whether defaults are recorded to the config file whenever an attempt to
|
||||
read read the value which is not present in it is done.
|
||||
@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ value}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool}{ value}}
|
||||
|
||||
These functions write the specified value to the config file and return TRUE
|
||||
These functions write the specified value to the config file and return true
|
||||
on success.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{In place of a single overloaded method name, wxPython
|
||||
|
@ -39,10 +39,10 @@ Normally you will write your application so that this button is only added to a
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxContextHelp::wxContextHelp}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxContextHelp}{\param{wxWindow*}{ window = NULL}, \param{bool}{ doNow = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{}{wxContextHelp}{\param{wxWindow*}{ window = NULL}, \param{bool}{ doNow = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructs a context help object, calling \helpref{BeginContextHelp}{wxcontexthelpbegincontexthelp} if\rtfsp
|
||||
{\it doNow} is TRUE (the default).
|
||||
{\it doNow} is true (the default).
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it window} is NULL, the top window is used.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Destroys the context help object.
|
||||
Puts the application into context-sensitive help mode. {\it window} is the window
|
||||
which will be used to catch events; if NULL, the top window will be used.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the application was successfully put into context-sensitive help mode.
|
||||
Returns true if the application was successfully put into context-sensitive help mode.
|
||||
This function only returns when the event loop has finished.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxContextHelp::EndContextHelp}\label{wxcontexthelpendcontexthelp}
|
||||
|
@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ selected.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsEmpty}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the control is empty or {\tt FALSE} if it has some items.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the control is empty or {\tt false} if it has some items.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ it is best to clean them up explicitly.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if cursor data is present.
|
||||
Returns true if cursor data is present.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCursor::operator $=$}\label{wxcursorassignment}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Commits previous transactions. Not implemented.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{ErrorOccured}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the last action caused an error.
|
||||
Returns true if the last action caused an error.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDatabase::ErrorSnapshot}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Returns the ODBC environment handle.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetInfo}{\param{long}{ infoType}, \param{const wxString\& }{buf}, \param{int}{ bufSize=-1}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns requested information. The return value is TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns requested information. The return value is true if successful, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it infoType} is an ODBC identifier specifying the type of information to be returned.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -183,11 +183,11 @@ Returns the current username.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDatabase::GetODBCVersionFloat}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{float}{GetODBCVersionFloat}{\param{bool}{ implementation=TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{float}{GetODBCVersionFloat}{\param{bool}{ implementation=true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the version of ODBC in floating point format, e.g. 2.50.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it implementation} should be TRUE to get the DLL version, or FALSE to get the
|
||||
{\it implementation} should be true to get the DLL version, or false to get the
|
||||
version defined in the {\tt sql.h} header file.
|
||||
|
||||
This function can return the value 0.0 if the header version number is not defined (for early
|
||||
@ -195,11 +195,11 @@ versions of ODBC).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDatabase::GetODBCVersionString}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxString}{GetODBCVersionString}{\param{bool}{ implementation=TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{wxString}{GetODBCVersionString}{\param{bool}{ implementation=true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the version of ODBC in string format, e.g. ``02.50".
|
||||
|
||||
{\it implementation} should be TRUE to get the DLL version, or FALSE to get the
|
||||
{\it implementation} should be true to get the DLL version, or false to get the
|
||||
version defined in the {\tt sql.h} header file.
|
||||
|
||||
This function can return the value ``00.00" if the header version number is not defined (for early
|
||||
@ -215,11 +215,11 @@ Not implemented.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsOpen}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if a connection is open.
|
||||
Returns true if a connection is open.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDatabase::Open}\label{wxdatabaseopen}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const wxString\& }{datasource}, \param{bool}{ exclusive = FALSE}, \param{bool }{readOnly = TRUE},
|
||||
\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const wxString\& }{datasource}, \param{bool}{ exclusive = false}, \param{bool }{readOnly = true},
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{username = ``ODBC"}, \param{const wxString\& }{password = ``"}}
|
||||
|
||||
Connect to a data source. {\it datasource} contains the name of the ODBC data
|
||||
|
@ -87,13 +87,13 @@ Constructs a data format object for a custom format identified by its name
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxDataFormat\&}{ format}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the formats are equal.
|
||||
Returns true if the formats are equal.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDataFormat::operator $!=$}\label{wxdataformatoperatorneq}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxDataFormat\&}{ format}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the formats are different.
|
||||
Returns true if the formats are different.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDataFormat::GetId}\label{wxdataformatgetid}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ in list context it returns a list containing all the supported formats.}
|
||||
\constfunc{virtual bool}{GetDataHere}{\param{const wxDataFormat\&}{ format}, \param{void }{*buf} }
|
||||
|
||||
The method will write the data of the format {\it format} in the buffer {\it
|
||||
buf} and return TRUE on success, FALSE on failure.
|
||||
buf} and return true on success, false on failure.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDataObject::GetDataSize}\label{wxdataobjectgetdatasize}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -196,5 +196,5 @@ native format of the wxDataObject.
|
||||
Set the data in the format {\it format} of the length {\it len} provided in the
|
||||
buffer {\it buf}.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE on success, FALSE on failure.
|
||||
Returns true on success, false on failure.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Returns the date representing the first day of the year.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsLeapYear}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the year of this date is a leap year.
|
||||
Returns true if the year of this date is a leap year.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDate::Set}\label{wxdateset}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Sets the current format type.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDate::SetOption}\label{wxdatesetoption}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{SetOption}{\param{int}{ option}, \param{const bool}{ enable=TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{int}{SetOption}{\param{int}{ option}, \param{const bool}{ enable=true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Enables or disables an option for formatting.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -315,37 +315,37 @@ Decrements the date (postfix or prefix).
|
||||
|
||||
\func{friend bool}{operator $<$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
|
||||
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is earlier than {\it date2}.
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is earlier than {\it date2}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDate::operator $<=$}\label{wxdatelessthaneq}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{friend bool}{operator $<=$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
|
||||
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is earlier than or equal to {\it date2}.
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is earlier than or equal to {\it date2}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDate::operator $>$}\label{wxdategreaterthan}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{friend bool}{operator $>$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
|
||||
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is later than {\it date2}.
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is later than {\it date2}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDate::operator $>=$}\label{wxdategreaterthaneq}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{friend bool}{operator $>=$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
|
||||
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is later than or equal to {\it date2}.
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is later than or equal to {\it date2}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDate::operator $==$}\label{wxdateequals}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{friend bool}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
|
||||
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is equal to {\it date2}.
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is equal to {\it date2}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDate::operator $!=$}\label{wxdatenotequals}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{friend bool}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
|
||||
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is not equal to {\it date2}.
|
||||
Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is not equal to {\it date2}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDate::operator \cinsert}\label{wxdateinsert}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of years.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{operator$==$}{\param{wxDateSpan\&}{ other}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date span is equal to the other one. Two date spans
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this date span is equal to the other one. Two date spans
|
||||
are considered equal if and only if they have the same number of years and
|
||||
months and the same total number of days (counting both days and weeks).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ months and the same total number of days (counting both days and weeks).
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{operator$!=$}{\param{wxDateSpan\&}{ other}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date span is different from the other one.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this date span is different from the other one.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ given week day.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{static bool}{IsLeapYear}{\param{int }{year = Inv\_Year}, \param{Calendar }{cal = Gregorian}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the {\it year} is a leap one in the specified calendar.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the {\it year} is a leap one in the specified calendar.
|
||||
|
||||
This functions supports Gregorian and Julian calendars.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ This functions supports Gregorian and Julian calendars.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{static bool}{IsWestEuropeanCountry}{\param{Country }{country = Country\_Default}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function returns {\tt TRUE} if the specified (or default) country is one
|
||||
This function returns {\tt true} if the specified (or default) country is one
|
||||
of Western European ones. It is used internally by wxDateTime to determine the
|
||||
DST convention and date and time formatting rules.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ DST convention and date and time formatting rules.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{static bool}{IsDSTApplicable}{\param{int }{year = Inv\_Year}, \param{Country }{country = Country\_Default}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if DST was used n the given year (the current one by
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if DST was used n the given year (the current one by
|
||||
default) in the given country.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::Now}\label{wxdatetimenow}
|
||||
@ -779,7 +779,7 @@ Same as \helpref{Set}{wxdatetimesettm}.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsValid}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the object represents a valid time moment.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the object represents a valid time moment.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::GetTm}\label{wxdatetimegettm}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -874,13 +874,13 @@ both conventions for the week start. See the description of these
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsWorkDay}{\param{Country }{country = Country\_Default}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} is this day is not a holiday in the given country.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} is this day is not a holiday in the given country.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsGregorianDate}\label{wxdatetimeisgregoriandate}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsGregorianDate}{\param{GregorianAdoption }{country = Gr\_Standard}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the given date os later than the date of adoption of the
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the given date os later than the date of adoption of the
|
||||
Gregorian calendar in the given country (and hence the Gregorian calendar
|
||||
calculations make sense for it).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -908,25 +908,25 @@ format.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsEqualTo}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{datetime}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the two dates are strictly identical.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the two dates are strictly identical.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsEarlierThan}\label{wxdatetimeisearlierthan}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsEarlierThan}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{datetime}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date precedes the given one.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this date precedes the given one.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsLaterThan}\label{wxdatetimeislaterthan}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsLaterThan}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{datetime}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date is later than the given one.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this date is later than the given one.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsStrictlyBetween}\label{wxdatetimeisstrictlybetween}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsStrictlyBetween}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{t1}, \param{const wxDateTime\& }{t2}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date lies strictly between the two others,
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this date lies strictly between the two others,
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -936,8 +936,8 @@ Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date lies strictly between the two others,
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsBetween}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{t1}, \param{const wxDateTime\& }{t2}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if \helpref{IsStrictlyBetween}{wxdatetimeisstrictlybetween}
|
||||
is {\tt TRUE} or if the date is equal to one of the limit values.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if \helpref{IsStrictlyBetween}{wxdatetimeisstrictlybetween}
|
||||
is {\tt true} or if the date is equal to one of the limit values.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -947,19 +947,19 @@ is {\tt TRUE} or if the date is equal to one of the limit values.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsSameDate}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{dt}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the date is the same without comparing the time parts.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the date is the same without comparing the time parts.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsSameTime}\label{wxdatetimeissametime}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsSameTime}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{dt}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the time is the same (although dates may differ).
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the time is the same (although dates may differ).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsEqualUpTo}\label{wxdatetimeisequalupto}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsEqualUpTo}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{dt}, \param{const wxTimeSpan\& }{ts}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the date is equal to another one up to the given time
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the date is equal to another one up to the given time
|
||||
interval, i.e. if the absolute difference between the two dates is less than
|
||||
this interval.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1207,7 +1207,7 @@ For example, {\tt SetToWeekDay(2, wxDateTime::Wed)} will set the date to the
|
||||
second Wednesday in the current month and
|
||||
{\tt SetToWeekDay(-1, wxDateTime::Sun)} -- to the last Sunday in it.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the date was modified successfully, {\tt FALSE}
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the date was modified successfully, {\tt false}
|
||||
otherwise meaning that the specified date doesn't exist.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::GetWeekDay}\label{wxdatetimegetweekday2}
|
||||
@ -1225,7 +1225,7 @@ The effect of calling this function is the same as of calling
|
||||
{\tt SetToWeekDay(-1, weekday, month, year)}. The date will be set to the last
|
||||
{\it weekday} in the given month and year (the current ones by default).
|
||||
|
||||
Always returns {\tt TRUE}.
|
||||
Always returns {\tt true}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::GetLastWeekDay}\label{wxdatetimegetlastweekday}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1239,8 +1239,8 @@ Returns the copy of this object to which
|
||||
\func{bool}{SetToTheWeek}{\param{wxDateTime\_t }{numWeek}, \param{WeekDay }{weekday = Mon}, \param{WeekFlags}{flags = {\tt Monday\_First}}}
|
||||
|
||||
Set the date to the given {\it weekday} in the week with given number
|
||||
{\it numWeek}. The number should be in range $1\ldots53$ and {\tt FALSE} will
|
||||
be returned if the specified date doesn't exist. {\tt TRUE} is returned if the
|
||||
{\it numWeek}. The number should be in range $1\ldots53$ and {\tt false} will
|
||||
be returned if the specified date doesn't exist. {\tt true} is returned if the
|
||||
date was changed successfully.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::GetWeek}\label{wxdatetimegetweek}
|
||||
@ -1332,30 +1332,30 @@ year 1 is Rata Die day 1.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::ToTimezone}\label{wxdatetimetotimezone}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxDateTime}{ToTimezone}{\param{const TimeZone\& }{tz}, \param{bool }{noDST = FALSE}}
|
||||
\constfunc{wxDateTime}{ToTimezone}{\param{const TimeZone\& }{tz}, \param{bool }{noDST = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Transform the date to the given time zone. If {\it noDST} is {\tt TRUE}, no
|
||||
Transform the date to the given time zone. If {\it noDST} is {\tt true}, no
|
||||
DST adjustments will be made.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the date in the new time zone.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::MakeTimezone}\label{wxdatetimemaketimezone}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxDateTime\&}{MakeTimezone}{\param{const TimeZone\& }{tz}, \param{bool }{noDST = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{wxDateTime\&}{MakeTimezone}{\param{const TimeZone\& }{tz}, \param{bool }{noDST = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Modifies the object in place to represent the date in another time zone. If
|
||||
{\it noDST} is {\tt TRUE}, no DST adjustments will be made.
|
||||
{\it noDST} is {\tt true}, no DST adjustments will be made.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::ToGMT}\label{wxdatetimetogmt}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxDateTime}{ToGMT}{\param{bool }{noDST = FALSE}}
|
||||
\constfunc{wxDateTime}{ToGMT}{\param{bool }{noDST = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
This is the same as calling \helpref{ToTimezone}{wxdatetimetotimezone} with
|
||||
the argument {\tt GMT0}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDateTime::MakeGMT}\label{wxdatetimemakegmt}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxDateTime\&}{MakeGMT}{\param{bool }{noDST = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{wxDateTime\&}{MakeGMT}{\param{bool }{noDST = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
This is the same as calling \helpref{MakeTimezone}{wxdatetimemaketimezone} with
|
||||
the argument {\tt GMT0}.
|
||||
@ -1364,7 +1364,7 @@ the argument {\tt GMT0}.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{IsDST}{\param{Country }{country = Country\_Default}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the DST is applied for this date in the given country.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the DST is applied for this date in the given country.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Destroys the wxDataInputStream object.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{BigEndianOrdered}{\param{bool}{ be\_order}}
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it be\_order} is TRUE, all data will be read in big-endian
|
||||
If {\it be\_order} is true, all data will be read in big-endian
|
||||
order, such as written by programs on a big endian architecture
|
||||
(e.g. Sparc) or written by Java-Streams (which always use
|
||||
big-endian order).
|
||||
|
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Destroys the wxDataOutputStream object.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{BigEndianOrdered}{\param{bool}{ be\_order}}
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it be\_order} is TRUE, all data will be written in big-endian
|
||||
If {\it be\_order} is true, all data will be written in big-endian
|
||||
order, e.g. for reading on a Sparc or from Java-Streams (which
|
||||
always use big-endian order), otherwise data will be written in
|
||||
little-endian order.
|
||||
|
@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ ODBC errors.}
|
||||
Default cursor scrolling is defined by wxODBC\_FWD\_ONLY\_CURSORS in setup.h
|
||||
when the wxWindows library is built. This behavior can be overridden when
|
||||
an instance of a wxDb is created (see \helpref{wxDb constructor}{wxdbconstr}).
|
||||
Default setting of this value TRUE, as not all databases/drivers support
|
||||
Default setting of this value true, as not all databases/drivers support
|
||||
both types of cursors.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ the DB catalog to. Default is SQL\_CATALOG\_FILENAME.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the catalog request was successful, or FALSE if there was some
|
||||
Returns true if the catalog request was successful, or false if there was some
|
||||
reason that the catalog could not be generated.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Example}
|
||||
@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ Permanently "commits" changes (insertions/deletions/updates) to the database.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the commit was successful, or FALSE if the commit failed.
|
||||
Returns true if the commit was successful, or false if the commit failed.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ ODBC functions directly (i.e. SQLFreeEnv()).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
The function always returns FALSE, so a call to this function can be made
|
||||
The function always returns false, so a call to this function can be made
|
||||
in the return statement of a code block in the event of a failure to
|
||||
perform an action (see the example below).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -686,7 +686,7 @@ one in context and displaying the ones you choose.
|
||||
pDb->DispAllErrors(henv, hdbc, hstmt); // Display all other errors, if any
|
||||
pDb->RollbackTrans(); // Rollback the transaction
|
||||
CloseCursor(); // Close the cursor
|
||||
return(FALSE); // Return Failure
|
||||
return(false); // Return Failure
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ Drops the data table view named in 'viewName'.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
If the view does not exist, this function will return TRUE. Note that views are not supported with all datasources.
|
||||
If the view does not exist, this function will return true. Note that views are not supported with all datasources.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDb::ExecSql}\label{wxdbexecsql}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -955,7 +955,7 @@ This function is primarily for use by the \helpref{wxDb::GetColumns}{wxdbgetcolu
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Currently always returns TRUE.
|
||||
Currently always returns true.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1087,8 +1087,8 @@ when the wxDb connection is initially created (see
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if this datasource connection is defined as using only forward
|
||||
scrolling cursors, or FALSE if the connection is defined as being allowed to
|
||||
Returns true if this datasource connection is defined as using only forward
|
||||
scrolling cursors, or false if the connection is defined as being allowed to
|
||||
use backward scrolling cursors and their associated functions (see note above).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
@ -1118,7 +1118,7 @@ This function may indicate that the database connection is open, even if
|
||||
the call to \helpref{wxDb::Open}{wxdbopen} may have failed to fully
|
||||
initialize the connection correctly. The connection to the database
|
||||
{\it is} open and can be used via the direct SQL commands, if this
|
||||
function returns TRUE. Other functions which depend on the
|
||||
function returns true. Other functions which depend on the
|
||||
\helpref{wxDb::Open}{wxdbopen} to have completed correctly may not function
|
||||
as expected. The return result from \helpref{wxDb::Open}{wxdbopen} is the
|
||||
only way to know if complete initialization of this wxDb connection was
|
||||
@ -1239,14 +1239,14 @@ It is possible to have connections to multiple datasources open at the same
|
||||
time to support distributed database connections by having separate instances
|
||||
of wxDb objects that use either the same or different Dsn/Uid/AuthStr settings.
|
||||
|
||||
If this function returns a value of FALSE, it does not necessarily mean that
|
||||
If this function returns a value of false, it does not necessarily mean that
|
||||
the connection to the datasource was not opened. It may mean that some
|
||||
portion of the initialization of the connection failed (such as a datatype not
|
||||
being able to be determined how the datasource represents it). To determine
|
||||
if the connection to the database failed, use the \helpref{wxDb::IsOpen}{wxdbisopen}
|
||||
function after receiving a FALSE result back from this function to determine if
|
||||
the connection was opened or not. If this function returns FALSE, but \helpref{wxDb::IsOpen}{wxdbisopen}
|
||||
returns TRUE, then direct SQL commands may be passed to the database
|
||||
function after receiving a false result back from this function to determine if
|
||||
the connection was opened or not. If this function returns false, but \helpref{wxDb::IsOpen}{wxdbisopen}
|
||||
returns true, then direct SQL commands may be passed to the database
|
||||
connection and can be successfully executed, but use of the datatypes (such as
|
||||
by a wxDbTable instance) that are normally determined during open will not be
|
||||
possible.
|
||||
@ -1299,14 +1299,14 @@ use this connection.}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetDebugErrorMessages}{\param{bool }{state}}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{state}{Either TRUE (debug messages are logged) or FALSE (debug
|
||||
\docparam{state}{Either true (debug messages are logged) or false (debug
|
||||
messages are not logged).}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
Turns on/off debug error messages from the ODBC class library. When
|
||||
this function is passed TRUE, errors are reported to the user/logged automatically
|
||||
in a text or pop-up dialog when an ODBC error occurs. When passed FALSE,
|
||||
this function is passed true, errors are reported to the user/logged automatically
|
||||
in a text or pop-up dialog when an ODBC error occurs. When passed false,
|
||||
errors are silently handled.
|
||||
|
||||
When compiled in release mode (FINAL=1), this setting has no affect.
|
||||
@ -1317,13 +1317,13 @@ When compiled in release mode (FINAL=1), this setting has no affect.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDb::SetSqlLogging}\label{wxdbsetsqllogging}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{SetSqlLogging}{\param{wxDbSqlLogState}{ state}, \param{const wxString \&}{filename = SQL\_LOG\_FILENAME}, \param{bool }{ append = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{SetSqlLogging}{\param{wxDbSqlLogState}{ state}, \param{const wxString \&}{filename = SQL\_LOG\_FILENAME}, \param{bool }{ append = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{state}{Either sqlLogOFF or sqlLogON (see \helpref{enum wxDbSqlLogState}{wxdbcolfor}). Turns logging of SQL commands sent to the datasource OFF or ON.}
|
||||
\docparam{filename}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Name of the file to which the log text is to be written. Default is SQL\_LOG\_FILENAME.}
|
||||
\docparam{append}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Whether the file is appended to or overwritten. Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
\docparam{append}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Whether the file is appended to or overwritten. Default is false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1516,7 +1516,7 @@ a log file if SQL logging is turned on.
|
||||
|
||||
If SQL logging is off when a call to WriteSqlLog() is made, or there is a
|
||||
failure to write the log message to the log file, the function returns
|
||||
FALSE without performing the requested log, otherwise TRUE is returned.
|
||||
false without performing the requested log, otherwise true is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1786,7 +1786,7 @@ Frees the SQL environment handle being managed by the instance of this class.
|
||||
If the SQL environment handle was created using the long form of the
|
||||
\helpref{wxDbConnectInf}{wxdbconnectinf} constructor, then the flag indicating
|
||||
that the HENV should be destroyed when the classes destructor is called
|
||||
is reset to be FALSE, so that any future handles created using the
|
||||
is reset to be false, so that any future handles created using the
|
||||
\helpref{wxDbConnectInf::AllocHenv}{wxdbconnectinfallochenv} function
|
||||
must be manually released with a call to this function.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2179,7 +2179,7 @@ this function.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{BuildSelectStmt}{\param{wxString \&}{pWhereClause},
|
||||
\param{int }{typeOfWhere}, \param{const wxString \&}{qualTableName=""},
|
||||
\param{bool }{useLikeComparison=FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{bool }{useLikeComparison=false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructs the portion of a SQL statement which would follow the word 'WHERE'
|
||||
in a SQL statement to be passed to the datasource. The returned string
|
||||
@ -2197,8 +2197,8 @@ column names. For use when a FROM clause has been specified with the
|
||||
\helpref{wxDbTable::SetFromClause}{wxdbtablesetfromclause},
|
||||
to clarify which table a column name reference belongs to. Default is "".}
|
||||
\docparam{useLikeComparison}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Should the constructed WHERE
|
||||
clause utilize the LIKE comparison operator. If FALSE, then the '='
|
||||
operator is used. Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
clause utilize the LIKE comparison operator. If false, then the '='
|
||||
operator is used. Default is false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2227,8 +2227,8 @@ member function to determine if the datasource currently connected to supports
|
||||
this behavior or not before trying to select using "FOR UPDATE".
|
||||
|
||||
If the wxDbTable instance was created with the parameter wxDB\_QUERY\_ONLY, then
|
||||
this function will return FALSE. For all known databases which do not support
|
||||
the FOR UPDATE clause, this function will return FALSE also.
|
||||
this function will return false. For all known databases which do not support
|
||||
the FOR UPDATE clause, this function will return false also.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::CanUpdateByROWID}\label{wxdbtablecanupdatebyrowid}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2276,7 +2276,7 @@ to an Oracle datasource or not.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::ClearMemberVar}\label{wxdbtableclearmembervar}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{ClearMemberVar}{\param{UWORD }{colNo}, \param{bool }{setToNull=FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{ClearMemberVar}{\param{UWORD }{colNo}, \param{bool }{setToNull=false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Same as \helpref{wxDbTable::ClearMemberVars}{wxdbtableclearmembervars} except
|
||||
that this function clears only the specified column of its values, and
|
||||
@ -2286,21 +2286,21 @@ optionally sets the column to be a NULL column.
|
||||
and (noCols-1)) is the index of the column definition created using the
|
||||
\helpref{wxDbTable::SetColDefs}{wxdbtablesetcoldefs} function.}
|
||||
\docparam{setToNull}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Indicates whether the column should be
|
||||
flagged as being a NULL value stored in the bound memory variable. If TRUE,
|
||||
flagged as being a NULL value stored in the bound memory variable. If true,
|
||||
then any value stored in the bound member variable is cleared. Default is
|
||||
FALSE.}
|
||||
false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::ClearMemberVars}\label{wxdbtableclearmembervars}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{ClearMemberVars}{\param{bool }{setToNull=FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{ClearMemberVars}{\param{bool }{setToNull=false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Initializes all bound columns of the wxDbTable instance to zero. In the case
|
||||
of a string, zero is copied to the first byte of the string.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{setToNull}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Indicates whether all columns should be
|
||||
flagged as having a NULL value stored in the bound memory variable. If TRUE,
|
||||
flagged as having a NULL value stored in the bound memory variable. If true,
|
||||
then any value stored in the bound member variable is cleared. Default is
|
||||
FALSE.}
|
||||
false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2392,7 +2392,7 @@ this function.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CreateIndex}{\param{const wxString \&}{idxName}, \param{bool }{unique},
|
||||
\param{UWORD }{noIdxCols}, \param{wxDbIdxDef *}{pIdxDefs},
|
||||
\param{bool }{attemptDrop=TRUE}}
|
||||
\param{bool }{attemptDrop=true}}
|
||||
|
||||
This member function allows you to create secondary (non primary) indexes on
|
||||
your tables. You first create your table, normally specifying a primary
|
||||
@ -2413,7 +2413,7 @@ space of the datasource.}
|
||||
\docparam{pIdxDefs}{A pointer to an array wxDbIdxDef structures. }
|
||||
\docparam{attemptDrop}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Indicates if the function should try
|
||||
to execute a \helpref{wxDbTable::DropIndex}{wxdbtabledropindex} on the index
|
||||
name provided before trying to create the index name. Default is TRUE.}
|
||||
name provided before trying to create the index name. Default is true.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2462,20 +2462,20 @@ after executing this function.
|
||||
wxDbIdxDef idxDef[2]; // 2 columns make up the index
|
||||
|
||||
wxStrcpy(idxDef[0].ColName, "PART_DESC"); // Column 1
|
||||
idxDef[0].Ascending = TRUE;
|
||||
idxDef[0].Ascending = true;
|
||||
|
||||
wxStrcpy(idxDef[1].ColName, "SERIAL_NO"); // Column 2
|
||||
idxDef[1].Ascending = FALSE;
|
||||
idxDef[1].Ascending = false;
|
||||
|
||||
// Create a name for the index based on the table's name
|
||||
wxString indexName;
|
||||
indexName.Printf("%s_IDX1",parts->GetTableName());
|
||||
parts->CreateIndex(indexName, TRUE, 2, idxDef);
|
||||
parts->CreateIndex(indexName, true, 2, idxDef);
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::CreateTable}\label{wxdbtablecreatetable}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CreateTable}{\param{bool }{attemptDrop=TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{CreateTable}{\param{bool }{attemptDrop=true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a table based on the definitions previously defined for this
|
||||
wxDbTable instance.
|
||||
@ -2485,7 +2485,7 @@ wxDbTable instance.
|
||||
\docparam{attemptDrop}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Indicates whether the driver should
|
||||
attempt to drop the table before trying to create it. Some datasources will
|
||||
not allow creation of a table if the table already exists in the table space
|
||||
being used. Default is TRUE.}
|
||||
being used. Default is true.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2680,7 +2680,7 @@ login has sufficient privileges to do so.
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
If the index specified in the 'idxName' parameter does not exist, an error
|
||||
will be logged, and the function will return a result of FALSE.
|
||||
will be logged, and the function will return a result of false.
|
||||
|
||||
It is not necessary to call \helpref{wxDb::CommitTrans}{wxdbcommittrans}
|
||||
after executing this function.
|
||||
@ -2693,10 +2693,10 @@ Deletes the associated table if the user has sufficient privileges to do so.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
This function returns TRUE if the table does not exist, but only for
|
||||
This function returns true if the table does not exist, but only for
|
||||
supported databases (see \helpref{wxDb::Dbms}{wxdbdbms}). If a datasource
|
||||
is not specifically supported, and this function is called, the function
|
||||
will return FALSE.
|
||||
will return false.
|
||||
|
||||
Most datasources/ODBC drivers will delete any indexes associated with the
|
||||
table automatically, and others may not. Check the documentation for your
|
||||
@ -2794,9 +2794,9 @@ Before retrieving records, a query must be performed using
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
This function can only be used if the datasource connection used by the
|
||||
wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to FALSE. If the
|
||||
wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to false. If the
|
||||
connection does not allow backward scrolling cursors, this function will
|
||||
return FALSE, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
|
||||
return false, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2827,9 +2827,9 @@ Before retrieving records, a query must be performed using
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
This function can only be used if the datasource connection used by the
|
||||
wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to FALSE. If the
|
||||
wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to false. If the
|
||||
connection does not allow backward scrolling cursors, this function will
|
||||
return FALSE, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
|
||||
return false, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2837,8 +2837,8 @@ return FALSE, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::GetNewCursor}\label{wxdbtablegetnewcursor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{HSTMT *}{GetNewCursor}{\param{bool }{setCursor=FALSE},
|
||||
\param{bool }{bindColumns=TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{HSTMT *}{GetNewCursor}{\param{bool }{setCursor=false},
|
||||
\param{bool }{bindColumns=true}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function will create a new cursor that can be used to access the table
|
||||
being referenced by this wxDbTable instance, or to execute direct SQL commands
|
||||
@ -2848,9 +2848,9 @@ positioned.
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{setCursor}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Should this new cursor be set to be the
|
||||
current cursor after successfully creating the new cursor. Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
current cursor after successfully creating the new cursor. Default is false.}
|
||||
\docparam{bindColumns}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Should this new cursor be bound to all
|
||||
the memory variables that the default cursor is bound to. Default is TRUE.}
|
||||
the memory variables that the default cursor is bound to. Default is true.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2872,8 +2872,8 @@ performed using \helpref{wxDbTable::Query}{wxdbtablequery},
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
This function returns FALSE when the current cursor has reached the end of
|
||||
the result set. When FALSE is returned, data in the bound columns is
|
||||
This function returns false when the current cursor has reached the end of
|
||||
the result set. When false is returned, data in the bound columns is
|
||||
undefined.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
@ -2914,16 +2914,16 @@ query must be performed using \helpref{wxDbTable::Query}{wxdbtablequery},
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
This function returns FALSE when the current cursor has reached the beginning
|
||||
This function returns false when the current cursor has reached the beginning
|
||||
of the result set and there are now other rows prior to the cursors current
|
||||
position. When FALSE is returned, data in the bound columns is undefined.
|
||||
position. When false is returned, data in the bound columns is undefined.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
This function can only be used if the datasource connection used by the
|
||||
wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to FALSE. If the
|
||||
wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to false. If the
|
||||
connection does not allow backward scrolling cursors, this function will
|
||||
return FALSE, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
|
||||
return false, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3025,16 +3025,16 @@ this function to commit or rollback the insertion.
|
||||
{
|
||||
case DB_SUCCESS:
|
||||
parts->GetDb()->CommitTrans();
|
||||
return(TRUE);
|
||||
return(true);
|
||||
case DB_ERR_INTEGRITY_CONSTRAINT_VIOL:
|
||||
// Current data would result in a duplicate key
|
||||
// on one or more indexes that do not allow duplicates
|
||||
parts->GetDb()->RollbackTrans();
|
||||
return(FALSE);
|
||||
return(false);
|
||||
default:
|
||||
// Insert failed for some unexpected reason
|
||||
parts->GetDb()->RollbackTrans();
|
||||
return(FALSE);
|
||||
return(false);
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3066,14 +3066,14 @@ done after a commit on the database connection.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the cursor associated with this wxDbTable object is closed
|
||||
after a commit or rollback operation. Returns FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the cursor associated with this wxDbTable object is closed
|
||||
after a commit or rollback operation. Returns false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
If more than one wxDbTable instance used the same database connection, all cursors
|
||||
which use the database connection are closed on the commit if this function
|
||||
indicates TRUE.
|
||||
indicates true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::IsQueryOnly}\label{wxdbtableisqueryonly}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3081,12 +3081,12 @@ indicates TRUE.
|
||||
|
||||
Accessor function that returns a value indicating if this wxDbTable instance
|
||||
was created to allow only queries to be performed on the bound columns. If
|
||||
this function returns TRUE, then no actions may be performed using this
|
||||
this function returns true, then no actions may be performed using this
|
||||
wxDbTable instance that would modify (insert/delete/update) the table's data.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::Open}\label{wxdbtableopen}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool }{Open}{\param{bool }{checkPrivileges=FALSE}, \param{bool }{checkTableExists=TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool }{Open}{\param{bool }{checkPrivileges=false}, \param{bool }{checkTableExists=true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Every wxDbTable instance must be opened before it can be used. This function
|
||||
checks for the existence of the requested table, binds columns, creates required
|
||||
@ -3098,14 +3098,14 @@ row in the datasource.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{checkPrivileges}{Indicates whether the Open() function should check
|
||||
whether the current connected user has at least SELECT privileges to access the
|
||||
table to which they are trying to open. Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
table to which they are trying to open. Default is false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{checkTableExists}{Indicates whether the Open() function should check
|
||||
whether the table exists in the database or not before opening it. Default is TRUE.}
|
||||
whether the table exists in the database or not before opening it. Default is true.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
If the function returns a FALSE value due to the table not existing, a log
|
||||
If the function returns a false value due to the table not existing, a log
|
||||
entry is recorded for the datasource connection indicating the problem
|
||||
that was detected when checking for table existence. Note that it is usually
|
||||
best for the calling routine to check for the existence of the table and for
|
||||
@ -3163,7 +3163,7 @@ The second form of the function has no return value.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::Query}\label{wxdbtablequery}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool }{Query}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=FALSE}, \param{bool }{distinct=FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{virtual bool }{Query}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=false}, \param{bool }{distinct=false}}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3171,11 +3171,11 @@ The second form of the function has no return value.
|
||||
as they are retrieved. If the RDBMS is not capable of the FOR UPDATE clause,
|
||||
this argument is ignored. See
|
||||
\helpref{wxDbTable::CanSelectForUpdate}{wxdbtablecanselectforupdate} for
|
||||
additional information regarding this argument. Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
additional information regarding this argument. Default is false.}
|
||||
\docparam{distinct}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Allows selection of only distinct values
|
||||
from the query (SELECT DISTINCT ... FROM ...). The notion of DISTINCT
|
||||
applies to all columns returned in the result set, not individual columns.
|
||||
Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
Default is false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3346,8 +3346,8 @@ either \helpref{wxDbTable::GetFirst}{wxdbtablegetfirst} or
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::QueryMatching}\label{wxdbtablequerymatching}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool }{QueryMatching}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=FALSE},
|
||||
\param{bool }{distinct=FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{virtual bool }{QueryMatching}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=false},
|
||||
\param{bool }{distinct=false}}
|
||||
|
||||
QueryMatching allows querying of records from the table associated with
|
||||
the wxDbTable object by matching "columns" to values.
|
||||
@ -3363,11 +3363,11 @@ object to "32", and then call wxDbTable::QueryMatching().
|
||||
as they are queried (SELECT ... FOR UPDATE). If the RDBMS is not capable of
|
||||
the FOR UPDATE clause, this argument is ignored. See
|
||||
\helpref{wxDbTable::CanSelectForUpdate}{wxdbtablecanselectforupdate} for
|
||||
additional information regarding this argument. Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
additional information regarding this argument. Default is false.}
|
||||
\docparam{distinct}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Allows selection of only distinct values
|
||||
from the query (SELECT DISTINCT ... FROM ...). The notion of DISTINCT
|
||||
applies to all columns returned in the result set, not individual columns.
|
||||
Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
Default is false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3401,7 +3401,7 @@ this function.
|
||||
// Incomplete code sample
|
||||
parts->ClearMemberVars(); // Set all columns to zero
|
||||
wxStrcpy(parts->PartNumber,"32"); // Set columns to query on
|
||||
parts->OnHold = TRUE;
|
||||
parts->OnHold = true;
|
||||
parts->QueryMatching(); // Query
|
||||
// Display all records queried
|
||||
while(parts->GetNext())
|
||||
@ -3410,8 +3410,8 @@ this function.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::QueryOnKeyFields}\label{wxdbtablequeryonkeyfields}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool }{QueryOnKeyFields}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=FALSE},
|
||||
\param{bool }{distinct=FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{bool }{QueryOnKeyFields}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=false},
|
||||
\param{bool }{distinct=false}}
|
||||
|
||||
QueryOnKeyFields provides an easy mechanism to query records in the table
|
||||
associated with the wxDbTable object by the primary index column(s). Simply
|
||||
@ -3429,11 +3429,11 @@ is non-null.
|
||||
as they are queried (SELECT ... FOR UPDATE). If the RDBMS is not capable of
|
||||
the FOR UPDATE clause, this argument is ignored. See
|
||||
\helpref{wxDbTable::CanSelectForUpdate}{wxdbtablecanselectforupdate} for
|
||||
additional information regarding this argument. Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
additional information regarding this argument. Default is false.}
|
||||
\docparam{distinct}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Allows selection of only distinct values
|
||||
from the query (SELECT DISTINCT ... FROM ...). The notion of DISTINCT
|
||||
applies to all columns returned in the result set, not individual columns.
|
||||
Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
Default is false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3483,8 +3483,8 @@ table's columns are refreshed to reflect the current data in the database.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetColDefs}{\param{UWORD }{index}, \param{const wxString \&}{fieldName},
|
||||
\param{int }{dataType}, \param{void *}{pData}, \param{SWORD }{cType},
|
||||
\param{int }{size}, \param{bool }{keyField = FALSE}, \param{bool }{upd = TRUE},
|
||||
\param{bool }{insAllow = TRUE}, \param{bool }{derivedCol = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{int }{size}, \param{bool }{keyField = false}, \param{bool }{upd = true},
|
||||
\param{bool }{insAllow = true}, \param{bool }{derivedCol = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxDbColDataPtr *}{SetColDefs}{\param{wxDbColInf *}{colInfs}, \param{UWORD }{numCols}}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3526,13 +3526,13 @@ Other valid types are available also, but these are the most common ones:}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{size}{Maximum size in bytes of the {\it pData} object.}
|
||||
\docparam{keyField}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Indicates if this column is part of the
|
||||
primary index. Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
primary index. Default is false.}
|
||||
\docparam{upd}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Are updates allowed on this column?
|
||||
Default is TRUE.}
|
||||
Default is true.}
|
||||
\docparam{insAllow}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Inserts allowed on this column?
|
||||
Default is TRUE.}
|
||||
Default is true.}
|
||||
\docparam{derivedCol}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Is this a derived column (non-base
|
||||
table column for query only)? Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
table column for query only)? Default is false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{colInfs}{Pointer to an array of wxDbColInf instances which contains
|
||||
all the information necessary to create {\it numCols} column definitions.}
|
||||
@ -3565,14 +3565,14 @@ were to be copied over to another datasource or table.
|
||||
colDefs[0].PtrDataObj = PartNumber;
|
||||
colDefs[0].SqlCtype = SQL_C_CHAR;
|
||||
colDefs[0].SzDataObj = PART_NUMBER_LEN;
|
||||
colDefs[0].KeyField = TRUE;
|
||||
colDefs[0].Updateable = FALSE;
|
||||
colDefs[0].InsertAllowed= TRUE;
|
||||
colDefs[0].DerivedCol = FALSE;
|
||||
colDefs[0].KeyField = true;
|
||||
colDefs[0].Updateable = false;
|
||||
colDefs[0].InsertAllowed= true;
|
||||
colDefs[0].DerivedCol = false;
|
||||
|
||||
// Shortcut using this function
|
||||
SetColDefs(0, "PART_NUMBER", DB_DATA_TYPE_VARCHAR, PartNumber,
|
||||
SQL_C_CHAR, PART_NUMBER_LEN, TRUE, FALSE,TRUE,FALSE);
|
||||
SQL_C_CHAR, PART_NUMBER_LEN, true, false,true,false);
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::SetCursor}\label{wxdbtablesetcursor}
|
||||
@ -3655,10 +3655,10 @@ the datasource knows on which column values the tables should be joined on.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbTable::SetColNull}\label{wxdbtablesetcolnull}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{SetColNull}{\param{UWORD }{colNo}, \param{bool }{set=TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{SetColNull}{\param{UWORD }{colNo}, \param{bool }{set=true}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{SetColNull}{\param{const wxString \&}{colName},
|
||||
\param{bool }{set=TRUE}}
|
||||
\param{bool }{set=true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Both forms of this function allow a member variable representing a column
|
||||
in the table associated with this wxDbTable object to be set to NULL.
|
||||
@ -3672,9 +3672,9 @@ the actual column name to be specified.
|
||||
\docparam{colNo}{Index into the column definitions used when first defining
|
||||
this wxDbTable object.}
|
||||
\docparam{colName}{Actual data table column name that is to be set to NULL.}
|
||||
\docparam{set}{Whether the column is set to NULL or not. Passing TRUE sets
|
||||
the column to NULL, passing FALSE sets the column to be non-NULL. Default is
|
||||
TRUE.}
|
||||
\docparam{set}{Whether the column is set to NULL or not. Passing true sets
|
||||
the column to NULL, passing false sets the column to be non-NULL. Default is
|
||||
true.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3835,7 +3835,7 @@ Performs updates to the base table of the wxDbTable object, updating only the
|
||||
rows which match the criteria specified in the {\it pWhereClause}.
|
||||
|
||||
All columns that are bound to member variables for this wxDbTable instance
|
||||
that were defined with the "updateable" parameter set to TRUE will be updated
|
||||
that were defined with the "updateable" parameter set to true will be updated
|
||||
with the information currently held in the memory variable.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
@ -4032,9 +4032,9 @@ that the client keeps ownership.
|
||||
int int_var;
|
||||
wxChar string_name[255];
|
||||
table->SetColDef (0, "column 0", DB_DATA_TYPE_INTEGER, &int_var,
|
||||
SQL_C_LONG, sizeof(int_var), TRUE);
|
||||
SQL_C_LONG, sizeof(int_var), true);
|
||||
table->SetColDef (1, "column 1", DB_DATA_TYPE_VARCHAR, &string_name,
|
||||
SQL_C_LONG, sizeof(string_name), FALSE);
|
||||
SQL_C_LONG, sizeof(string_name), false);
|
||||
|
||||
// now let's define columns in the grid
|
||||
|
||||
@ -4060,10 +4060,10 @@ that the client keeps ownership.
|
||||
// in the grid we will see only the rows of the result query
|
||||
m_dbTable->Query();
|
||||
|
||||
wxDbGridTableBase *dbgrid = new wxDbGridTableBase(table, columns, wxUSE_QUERY, TRUE);
|
||||
wxDbGridTableBase *dbgrid = new wxDbGridTableBase(table, columns, wxUSE_QUERY, true);
|
||||
delete columns; // not needed anymore
|
||||
wxGrid *grid = new wxGrid ( ... );
|
||||
grid->SetTable(dbgrid, TRUE);
|
||||
grid->SetTable(dbgrid, true);
|
||||
grid->Fit();
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -4077,7 +4077,7 @@ that the client keeps ownership.
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbGridTableBase::wxDbGridTableBase}\label{wxdbgridtablebaseconstr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxDbGridTableBase}{\param{wxDbTable *}{tab}, \param{wxDbGridColInfo *}{ColInfo},
|
||||
\param{int }{count = wxUSE\_QUERY}, \param{bool }{takeOwnership = TRUE}}
|
||||
\param{int }{count = wxUSE\_QUERY}, \param{bool }{takeOwnership = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -4089,8 +4089,8 @@ See the example \helpref{above}{wxdbgridtablebase}.}
|
||||
\docparam{count}{You can use a query result set (wxUSE\_QUERY, to use wxDbTable::Count(wxDbTable::Count()
|
||||
or you can fix the total number of rows (count >= 0) to display, or specify it if you already know the size in avoid calling }
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{takeOwnership}{ If TRUE, this class deletes wxDbTable when it stops
|
||||
referring to it, if FALSE application must
|
||||
\docparam{takeOwnership}{ If true, this class deletes wxDbTable when it stops
|
||||
referring to it, if false application must
|
||||
take care of deleting it. }
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbGridTableBase::ValidateRow}\label{wxdbgridtablebasevalidate}
|
||||
@ -4119,7 +4119,7 @@ function is currently unsupported.
|
||||
\membersection{wxDbGridTableBase::AssignDbTable}\label{wxdbgridtablebaseassigndbtable}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{AssignDbTable}{\param{wxDbTable *}{tab},\param{int }{count = wxUSE\_QUERY},
|
||||
\param{bool }{takeOwnership = TRUE}}
|
||||
\param{bool }{takeOwnership = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Resets the grid for using with a new database table, but using the same columns definition.
|
||||
This can be useful when re-querying the database and want to see the changes.
|
||||
@ -4128,6 +4128,6 @@ This can be useful when re-querying the database and want to see the changes.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{tab}{ Database table you want to assign to the grid. }
|
||||
\docparam{count}{ Number of rows you want to show or wxUSE\_QUERY for using a query. }
|
||||
\docparam{takeOwnership}{ If FALSE, user must take care of deleting tab after deleting
|
||||
the wxDbGridTableBase. If TRUE, deletion is made by destructor class. }
|
||||
\docparam{takeOwnership}{ If false, user must take care of deleting tab after deleting
|
||||
the wxDbGridTableBase. If true, deletion is made by destructor class. }
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ released for each drawing operation.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Blit}{\param{wxCoord}{ xdest}, \param{wxCoord}{ ydest}, \param{wxCoord}{ width}, \param{wxCoord}{ height},
|
||||
\param{wxDC* }{source}, \param{wxCoord}{ xsrc}, \param{wxCoord}{ ysrc}, \param{int}{ logicalFunc = wxCOPY},
|
||||
\param{bool }{useMask = FALSE}, \param{wxCoord}{ xsrcMask = -1}, \param{wxCoord}{ ysrcMask = -1}}
|
||||
\param{bool }{useMask = false}, \param{wxCoord}{ xsrcMask = -1}, \param{wxCoord}{ ysrcMask = -1}}
|
||||
|
||||
Copy from a source DC to this DC, specifying the destination
|
||||
coordinates, size of area to copy, source DC, source coordinates,
|
||||
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ logical function, whether to use a bitmap mask, and mask source position.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{logicalFunc}{Logical function to use: see \helpref{wxDC::SetLogicalFunction}{wxdcsetlogicalfunction}.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{useMask}{If TRUE, Blit does a transparent blit using the mask that is associated with the bitmap
|
||||
\docparam{useMask}{If true, Blit does a transparent blit using the mask that is associated with the bitmap
|
||||
selected into the source device context. The Windows implementation does the following if MaskBlt cannot be used:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{enumerate}
|
||||
@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ See \helpref{wxMemoryDC}{wxmemorydc} for typical usage.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{static bool}{CacheEnabled}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
On supported platforms (currently only Windows), returns TRUE
|
||||
On supported platforms (currently only Windows), returns true
|
||||
if the DC cache is enabled. The DC cache
|
||||
can speed up the \helpref{Blit}{wxdcblit} operation when
|
||||
drawing a large number of masked bitmaps.
|
||||
@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ The arc is drawn in an anticlockwise direction from the start point to the end p
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{DrawBitmap}{\param{const wxBitmap\&}{ bitmap}, \param{wxCoord}{ x}, \param{wxCoord}{ y}, \param{bool}{ transparent}}
|
||||
|
||||
Draw a bitmap on the device context at the specified point. If {\it transparent} is TRUE and the bitmap has
|
||||
Draw a bitmap on the device context at the specified point. If {\it transparent} is true and the bitmap has
|
||||
a transparency mask, the bitmap will be drawn transparently.
|
||||
|
||||
When drawing a mono-bitmap, the current text foreground colour will be used to draw the foreground
|
||||
@ -497,11 +497,11 @@ the {\it current brush colour}, and using a style:
|
||||
\item wxFLOOD\_BORDER: the area to be flooded is bounded by the given colour.
|
||||
\end{itemize}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE if the operation failed.
|
||||
Returns false if the operation failed.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it Note:} The present implementation for non-Windows platforms may fail to find
|
||||
colour borders if the pixels do not match the colour exactly. However the
|
||||
function will still return TRUE.
|
||||
function will still return true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::GetBackground}\label{wxdcgetbackground}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ Gets the {\it mapping mode} for the device context (see \helpref{wxDC::SetMapMod
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetOptimization}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if device context optimization is on.
|
||||
Returns true if device context optimization is on.
|
||||
See \helpref{wxDC::SetOptimization}{wxsetoptimization} for details.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::GetPen}\label{wxdcgetpen}
|
||||
@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ Gets the minimum vertical extent used in drawing commands so far.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the DC is ok to use.
|
||||
Returns true if the DC is ok to use.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::ResetBoundingBox}\label{wxdcresetboundingbox}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -938,7 +938,7 @@ The mapping mode can be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetOptimization}{\param{bool }{optimize}}
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it optimize} is TRUE (the default), this function sets optimization mode on.
|
||||
If {\it optimize} is true (the default), this function sets optimization mode on.
|
||||
This currently means that under X, the device context will not try to set a pen or brush
|
||||
property if it is known to be set already. This approach can fall down
|
||||
if non-wxWindows code is using the same device context or window, for example
|
||||
|
@ -66,6 +66,6 @@ store application-specific data in instances of the new class.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{ValidHost}{\param{const wxString\& }{host}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if this is a valid host name, FALSE otherwise. This always
|
||||
returns TRUE under MS Windows.
|
||||
Returns true if this is a valid host name, false otherwise. This always
|
||||
returns true under MS Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ transactions.
|
||||
Called by the server application to advise the client of a change in
|
||||
the data associated with the given item. Causes the client
|
||||
connection's \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnAdvise}{wxddeconnectiononadvise}
|
||||
member to be called. Returns TRUE if successful.
|
||||
member to be called. Returns true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::Execute}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Called by the client application to execute a command on the server. Can
|
||||
also be used to transfer arbitrary data to the server (similar
|
||||
to \helpref{wxDDEConnection::Poke}{wxddeconnectionpoke} in that respect). Causes the
|
||||
server connection's \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnExecute}{wxddeconnectiononexecute} member to be
|
||||
called. Returns TRUE if successful.
|
||||
called. Returns true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::Disconnect}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ program; it causes the \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnDisconnect}{wxddeconnectionon
|
||||
to be sent to the corresponding connection object in the other
|
||||
program. The default behaviour of {\bf OnDisconnect} is to delete the
|
||||
connection, but the calling application must explicitly delete its
|
||||
side of the connection having called {\bf Disconnect}. Returns TRUE if
|
||||
side of the connection having called {\bf Disconnect}. Returns true if
|
||||
successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::OnAdvise}\label{wxddeconnectiononadvise}
|
||||
@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ or NULL to indicate no data.
|
||||
|
||||
Message sent to the server application by the client, when the client
|
||||
wishes to start an `advise loop' for the given topic and item. The
|
||||
server can refuse to participate by returning FALSE.
|
||||
server can refuse to participate by returning false.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::OnStopAdvise}\label{wxddeconnectiononstopadvise}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ server can refuse to participate by returning FALSE.
|
||||
|
||||
Message sent to the server application by the client, when the client
|
||||
wishes to stop an `advise loop' for the given topic and item. The
|
||||
server can refuse to stop the advise loop by returning FALSE, although
|
||||
server can refuse to stop the advise loop by returning false, although
|
||||
this doesn't have much meaning in practice.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::Poke}\label{wxddeconnectionpoke}
|
||||
@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ this doesn't have much meaning in practice.
|
||||
Called by the client application to poke data into the server. Can be
|
||||
used to transfer arbitrary data to the server. Causes the server
|
||||
connection's \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnPoke}{wxddeconnectiononpoke} member
|
||||
to be called. Returns TRUE if successful.
|
||||
to be called. Returns true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::Request}\label{wxddeconnectionrequest}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ successful, NULL otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
Called by the client application to ask if an advise loop can be started
|
||||
with the server. Causes the server connection's \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnStartAdvise}{wxddeconnectiononstartadvise}\rtfsp
|
||||
member to be called. Returns TRUE if the server okays it, FALSE
|
||||
member to be called. Returns true if the server okays it, false
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::StopAdvise}\label{wxddeconnectionstopadvise}
|
||||
@ -197,5 +197,5 @@ otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
Called by the client application to ask if an advise loop can be
|
||||
stopped. Causes the server connection's \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnStopAdvise}{wxddeconnectiononstopadvise} member
|
||||
to be called. Returns TRUE if the server okays it, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
to be called. Returns true if the server okays it, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Constructs a server object.
|
||||
|
||||
Registers the server using the given service name. Under UNIX, the
|
||||
string must contain an integer id which is used as an Internet port
|
||||
number. FALSE is returned if the call failed (for example, the port
|
||||
number. false is returned if the call failed (for example, the port
|
||||
number is already in use).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDDEServer::OnAcceptConnection}\label{wxddeserveronacceptconnection}
|
||||
|
@ -44,14 +44,14 @@ derived instance.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the function succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the function succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDebugContext::GetCheckPrevious}\label{wxdebugcontextgetcheckprevious}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetCheckPrevious}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the memory allocator checks all previous memory blocks for errors.
|
||||
By default, this is FALSE since it slows down execution considerably.
|
||||
Returns true if the memory allocator checks all previous memory blocks for errors.
|
||||
By default, this is false since it slows down execution considerably.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ By default, this is FALSE since it slows down execution considerably.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetDebugMode}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if debug mode is on. If debug mode is on, the wxObject new and delete
|
||||
Returns true if debug mode is on. If debug mode is on, the wxObject new and delete
|
||||
operators store or use information about memory allocation. Otherwise,
|
||||
a straight malloc and free will be performed by these operators.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ This is obsolete, replaced by \helpref{wxLog}{wxlog} functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{HasStream}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if there is a stream currently associated
|
||||
Returns true if there is a stream currently associated
|
||||
with the debug context.
|
||||
|
||||
This is obsolete, replaced by \helpref{wxLog}{wxlog} functionality.
|
||||
@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ and whether instances of this class can be dynamically created.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDebugContext::PrintStatistics}\label{wxdebugcontextprintstatistics}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{PrintStatistics}{\param{bool}{ detailed = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{PrintStatistics}{\param{bool}{ detailed = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Performs a statistics analysis from the currently set checkpoint, writing
|
||||
to the current debug stream. The number of object and non-object
|
||||
@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ allocations is printed, together with the total size.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{detailed}{If TRUE, the function will also print how many
|
||||
\docparam{detailed}{If true, the function will also print how many
|
||||
objects of each class have been allocated, and the space taken by
|
||||
these class instances.}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ these class instances.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDebugContext::SetCheckpoint}\label{wxdebugcontextsetcheckpoint}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetCheckpoint}{\param{bool}{ all = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetCheckpoint}{\param{bool}{ all = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the current checkpoint: Dump and PrintStatistics operations will
|
||||
be performed from this point on. This allows you to ignore allocations
|
||||
@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ that have been performed up to this point.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{all}{If TRUE, the checkpoint is reset to include all
|
||||
\docparam{all}{If true, the checkpoint is reset to include all
|
||||
memory allocations since the program started.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDebugContext::SetCheckPrevious}\label{wxdebugcontextsetcheckprevious}
|
||||
@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ memory allocations since the program started.}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetCheckPrevious}{\param{bool}{ check}}
|
||||
|
||||
Tells the memory allocator to check all previous memory blocks for errors.
|
||||
By default, this is FALSE since it slows down execution considerably.
|
||||
By default, this is false since it slows down execution considerably.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -210,31 +210,31 @@ Iconizes or restores the dialog. Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{iconize}{If TRUE, iconizes the dialog box; if FALSE, shows and restores it.}
|
||||
\docparam{iconize}{If true, iconizes the dialog box; if false, shows and restores it.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
Note that in Windows, iconization has no effect since dialog boxes cannot be
|
||||
iconized. However, applications may need to explicitly restore dialog
|
||||
boxes under Motif which have user-iconizable frames, and under Windows
|
||||
calling {\tt Iconize(FALSE)} will bring the window to the front, as does
|
||||
\rtfsp{\tt Show(TRUE)}.
|
||||
calling {\tt Iconize(false)} will bring the window to the front, as does
|
||||
\rtfsp{\tt Show(true)}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialog::IsIconized}\label{wxdialogisiconized}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsIconized}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the dialog box is iconized. Windows only.
|
||||
Returns true if the dialog box is iconized. Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
Always returns FALSE under Windows since dialogs cannot be iconized.
|
||||
Always returns false under Windows since dialogs cannot be iconized.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialog::IsModal}\label{wxdialogismodal}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsModal}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the dialog box is modal, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the dialog box is modal, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialog::OnCharHook}\label{wxdialogoncharhook}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ The default handler for the wxID\_CANCEL identifier.
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
The function either calls {\bf EndModal(wxID\_CANCEL)} if the dialog is modal, or
|
||||
sets the return value to wxID\_CANCEL and calls {\bf Show(FALSE)} if the dialog is modeless.
|
||||
sets the return value to wxID\_CANCEL and calls {\bf Show(false)} if the dialog is modeless.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -289,8 +289,8 @@ The default handler for the wxID\_OK identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
The function calls
|
||||
\rtfsp\helpref{wxWindow::Validate}{wxwindowvalidate}, then \helpref{wxWindow::TransferDataFromWindow}{wxwindowtransferdatafromwindow}.
|
||||
If this returns TRUE, the function either calls {\bf EndModal(wxID\_OK)} if the dialog is modal, or
|
||||
sets the return value to wxID\_OK and calls {\bf Show(FALSE)} if the dialog is modeless.
|
||||
If this returns true, the function either calls {\bf EndModal(wxID\_OK)} if the dialog is modal, or
|
||||
sets the return value to wxID\_OK and calls {\bf Show(false)} if the dialog is modeless.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ until the dialog is hidden) or modeless (control returns immediately).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{flag}{If TRUE, the dialog will be modal, otherwise it will be modeless.}
|
||||
\docparam{flag}{If true, the dialog will be modal, otherwise it will be modeless.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialog::SetReturnCode}\label{wxdialogsetreturncode}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -394,8 +394,8 @@ Hides or shows the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{show}{If TRUE, the dialog box is shown and brought to the front;
|
||||
otherwise the box is hidden. If FALSE and the dialog is
|
||||
\docparam{show}{If true, the dialog box is shown and brought to the front;
|
||||
otherwise the box is hidden. If false and the dialog is
|
||||
modal, control is returned to the calling program.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
@ -66,8 +66,8 @@ done with it.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the dialup manager was initialized correctly. If this
|
||||
function returns {\tt FALSE}, no other functions will work neither, so it is a
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the dialup manager was initialized correctly. If this
|
||||
function returns {\tt false}, no other functions will work neither, so it is a
|
||||
good idea to call this function and check its result before calling any other
|
||||
wxDialUpManager methods
|
||||
|
||||
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ their number (may be $0$).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::Dial}\label{wxdialupmanagerdial}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Dial}{\param{const wxString\& }{nameOfISP = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{username = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{password = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{async = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{Dial}{\param{const wxString\& }{nameOfISP = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{username = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{password = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{async = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Dial the given ISP, use {\it username} and {\it password} to authenticate.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -102,10 +102,10 @@ If no {\it nameOfISP} is given, the function will select the default one
|
||||
and if no username and/or password are given, the function will try to do
|
||||
without them, but will ask the user if really needed.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it async} parameter is {\tt FALSE}, the function waits until the end of dialing
|
||||
and returns {\tt TRUE} upon successful completion.
|
||||
If {\it async} parameter is {\tt false}, the function waits until the end of dialing
|
||||
and returns {\tt true} upon successful completion.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it async} is {\tt TRUE}, the function only initiates the connection and
|
||||
If {\it async} is {\tt true}, the function only initiates the connection and
|
||||
returns immediately - the result is reported via events (an event is sent
|
||||
anyhow, but if dialing failed it will be a DISCONNECTED one).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ anyhow, but if dialing failed it will be a DISCONNECTED one).
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsDialing}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if (async) dialing is in progress.
|
||||
Returns true if (async) dialing is in progress.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Returns TRUE if (async) dialing is in progress.
|
||||
\func{bool}{CancelDialing}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Cancel dialing the number initiated with \helpref{Dial}{wxdialupmanagerdial}
|
||||
with async parameter equal to {\tt TRUE}.
|
||||
with async parameter equal to {\tt true}.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this won't result in DISCONNECTED event being sent.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Hang up the currently active dial up connection.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsAlwaysOnline}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the computer has a permanent network connection (i.e. is
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the computer has a permanent network connection (i.e. is
|
||||
on a LAN) and so there is no need to use Dial() function to go online.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB:} this functions tries to guess the result and it is not always
|
||||
@ -153,14 +153,14 @@ confirmation or give him a possibility to override it.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOnline}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the computer is connected to the network: under Windows,
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the computer is connected to the network: under Windows,
|
||||
this just means that a RAS connection exists, under Unix we check that
|
||||
the "well-known host" (as specified by
|
||||
\helpref{SetWellKnownHost}{wxdialupmanagersetwellknownhost}) is reachable.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::SetOnlineStatus}\label{wxdialupmanagersetonlinestatus}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetOnlineStatus}{\param{bool }{isOnline = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetOnlineStatus}{\param{bool }{isOnline = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sometimes the built-in logic for determining the online status may fail,
|
||||
so, in general, the user should be allowed to override it. This function
|
||||
@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ often should we repeat the check (each minute by default). Under Windows, the
|
||||
notification about the change of connection status is sent by the system and so
|
||||
we don't do any polling and this parameter is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt FALSE} if couldn't set up automatic check for online status.
|
||||
Returns {\tt false} if couldn't set up automatic check for online status.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::DisableAutoCheckOnlineStatus}\label{wxdialupmanagerdisableautocheckonlinestatus}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -102,14 +102,14 @@ class is not meant to be used polymorphically.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const wxString\& }{dir}}
|
||||
|
||||
Open the directory for enumerating, returns TRUE on success or FALSE if an
|
||||
Open the directory for enumerating, returns true on success or false if an
|
||||
error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDir::IsOpened}\label{wxdirisopened}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOpened}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the directory was successfully opened by a previous call to
|
||||
Returns true if the directory was successfully opened by a previous call to
|
||||
\helpref{Open}{wxdiropen}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDir::GetFirst}\label{wxdirgetfirst}
|
||||
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the directory was successfully opened by a previous call to
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetFirst}{\param{wxString* }{filename}, \param{const wxString\& }{filespec = wxEmptyString}, \param{int }{flags = wxDIR\_DEFAULT}}
|
||||
|
||||
Start enumerating all files matching {\it filespec} (or all files if it is
|
||||
empty) and flags, return TRUE on success.
|
||||
empty) and flags, return true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDir::GetNext}\label{wxdirgetnext}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ to \helpref{GetFirst}{wxdirgetfirst}.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{HasFiles}{\param{const wxString\& }{filespec = wxEmptyString}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the directory contains any files matching the given
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the directory contains any files matching the given
|
||||
{\it filespec}. If {\it filespec} is empty, look for any files at all. In any
|
||||
case, even hidden files are taken into account.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ case, even hidden files are taken into account.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{HasSubDirs}{\param{const wxString\& }{dirspec = wxEmptyString}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the directory contains any subdirectories (if a non
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the directory contains any subdirectories (if a non
|
||||
empty {\it filespec} is given, only check for directories matching it).
|
||||
The hidden subdirectories are taken into account as well.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -135,8 +135,8 @@ is valid. If the handle is valid, the library must be unloaded later with
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{libname}{Name of the shared object to load.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{success}{May point to a bool variable which will be set to TRUE or
|
||||
FALSE; may also be {\tt NULL}.}
|
||||
\docparam{success}{May point to a bool variable which will be set to true or
|
||||
false; may also be {\tt NULL}.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDllLoader::UnloadLibrary}\label{wxdllloaderunloadlibrary}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -57,9 +57,9 @@ The default constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Add}{
|
||||
\param{wxDataObjectSimple }{*dataObject},
|
||||
\param{bool }{preferred = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{bool }{preferred = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Adds the {\it dataObject} to the list of supported objects and it becomes the
|
||||
preferred object if {\it preferred} is TRUE.
|
||||
preferred object if {\it preferred} is true.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ object supports rendering its data.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{virtual bool}{GetDataHere}{\param{void }{*buf}}
|
||||
|
||||
Copy the data to the buffer, return TRUE on success. Must be implemented in the
|
||||
Copy the data to the buffer, return true on success. Must be implemented in the
|
||||
derived class if the object supports rendering its data.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{When implementing this method in wxPython, no additional
|
||||
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ method as a string.}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{SetData}{\param{size\_t }{len}, \param{const void }{*buf}}
|
||||
|
||||
Copy the data from the buffer, return TRUE on success. Must be implemented in
|
||||
Copy the data from the buffer, return true on success. Must be implemented in
|
||||
the derived class if the object supports setting its data.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{When implementing this method in wxPython, the data comes
|
||||
|
@ -72,16 +72,16 @@ A list of all document templates.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocManager::wxDocManager}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{wxDocManager}{\param{long}{ flags = wxDEFAULT\_DOCMAN\_FLAGS}, \param{bool}{ initialize = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{wxDocManager}{\param{long}{ flags = wxDEFAULT\_DOCMAN\_FLAGS}, \param{bool}{ initialize = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor. Create a document manager instance dynamically near the start of your application
|
||||
before doing any document or view operations.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it flags} is currently unused.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it initialize} is TRUE, the \helpref{Initialize}{wxdocmanagerinitialize} function will be called
|
||||
If {\it initialize} is true, the \helpref{Initialize}{wxdocmanagerinitialize} function will be called
|
||||
to create a default history list object. If you derive from wxDocManager, you may wish to call the
|
||||
base constructor with FALSE, and then call Initialize in your own constructor, to allow
|
||||
base constructor with false, and then call Initialize in your own constructor, to allow
|
||||
your own Initialize or OnCreateFileHistory functions to be called.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocManager::\destruct{wxDocManager}}
|
||||
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Adds the template to the document manager's template list.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocManager::CloseDocuments}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CloseDocuments}{\param{bool }{force = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{CloseDocuments}{\param{bool }{force = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Closes all currently opened documents.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ the opportunity to override functionality. If OnCreateFileHistory was called
|
||||
from the constructor, an overridden virtual OnCreateFileHistory would not be
|
||||
called due to C++'s `interesting' constructor semantics. In fact Initialize
|
||||
\rtfsp{\it is} called from the wxDocManager constructor, but this can be
|
||||
vetoed by passing FALSE to the second argument, allowing the derived class's
|
||||
vetoed by passing false to the second argument, allowing the derived class's
|
||||
constructor to call Initialize, possibly calling a different OnCreateFileHistory
|
||||
from the default.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ two values, eg:\par
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocManager::SelectDocumentType}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxDocTemplate *}{SelectDocumentType}{\param{wxDocTemplate **}{templates},
|
||||
\param{int}{ noTemplates}, \param{bool}{ sort=FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{int}{ noTemplates}, \param{bool}{ sort=false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a document template by asking the user (if there is more than one template).
|
||||
This function is used in wxDocManager::CreateDocument.
|
||||
@ -379,14 +379,14 @@ This function is used in wxDocManager::CreateDocument.
|
||||
\docparam{sort}{If more than one template is passed in in {\it templates},
|
||||
then this parameter indicates whether the list of templates that the user
|
||||
will have to choose from is sorted or not when shown the choice box dialog.
|
||||
Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
Default is false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\perlnote{In wxPerl {\tt templates} is a reference to a list of templates.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocManager::SelectViewType}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxDocTemplate *}{SelectViewType}{\param{wxDocTemplate **}{templates},
|
||||
\param{int}{ noTemplates}, \param{bool}{ sort=FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{int}{ noTemplates}, \param{bool}{ sort=false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a document template by asking the user (if there is more than one template),
|
||||
displaying a list of valid views. This function is used in wxDocManager::CreateView.
|
||||
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ those relevant to the document in question, and often there will only be one suc
|
||||
\docparam{sort}{If more than one template is passed in in {\it templates},
|
||||
then this parameter indicates whether the list of templates that the user
|
||||
will have to choose from is sorted or not when shown the choice box dialog.
|
||||
Default is FALSE.}
|
||||
Default is false.}
|
||||
|
||||
\perlnote{In wxPerl {\tt templates} is a reference to a list of templates.}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Returns the view type name, as passed to the document template constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsVisible}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the document template can be shown in user dialogs, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the document template can be shown in user dialogs, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocTemplate::SetDefaultExtension}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Filename associated with this document (``" if none).
|
||||
|
||||
\member{bool}{m\_documentModified}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the document has been modified, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the document has been modified, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocument::m\_documentTemplate}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ If the view is not already in the list of views, adds the view and calls OnChang
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{Close}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Closes the document, by calling OnSaveModified and then (if this returned TRUE) OnCloseDocument.
|
||||
Closes the document, by calling OnSaveModified and then (if this returned true) OnCloseDocument.
|
||||
This does not normally delete the document object: use DeleteAllViews to do this implicitly.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocument::DeleteAllViews}
|
||||
@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ See also: \helpref{GetFirstView}{wxdocumentgetfirstview}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{virtual bool}{IsModified}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the document has been modified since the last save, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the document has been modified since the last save, false otherwise.
|
||||
You may need to override this if your document view maintains its own
|
||||
record of being modified (for example if using wxTextWindow to view and edit the document).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ was configured.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual void}{Modify}{\param{bool}{ modify}}
|
||||
|
||||
Call with TRUE to mark the document as modified since the last save, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Call with true to mark the document as modified since the last save, false otherwise.
|
||||
You may need to override this if your document view maintains its own
|
||||
record of being modified (for example if using wxTextWindow to view and edit the document).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ one has just been removed).
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{OnCloseDocument}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
The default implementation calls DeleteContents (an empty implementation)
|
||||
sets the modified flag to FALSE. Override this to
|
||||
sets the modified flag to false. Override this to
|
||||
supply additional behaviour when the document is closed with Close.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocument::OnCreate}
|
||||
@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ supply additional behaviour when the document is closed with Close.
|
||||
Called just after the document object is created to give it a chance
|
||||
to initialize itself. The default implementation uses the
|
||||
template associated with the document to create an initial view.
|
||||
If this function returns FALSE, the document is deleted.
|
||||
If this function returns false, the document is deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocument::OnCreateCommandProcessor}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ document, and notifies the views that the filename (in fact, the title) has chan
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{OnOpenDocument}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructs an input file stream for the given filename (which must not be empty),
|
||||
and calls LoadObject. If LoadObject returns TRUE, the document is set to
|
||||
and calls LoadObject. If LoadObject returns true, the document is set to
|
||||
unmodified; otherwise, an error message box is displayed. The document's
|
||||
views are notified that the filename has changed, to give windows an opportunity
|
||||
to update their titles. All of the document's views are then updated.
|
||||
@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ to update their titles. All of the document's views are then updated.
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{OnSaveDocument}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructs an output file stream for the given filename (which must not be empty),
|
||||
and calls SaveObject. If SaveObject returns TRUE, the document is set to
|
||||
and calls SaveObject. If SaveObject returns true, the document is set to
|
||||
unmodified; otherwise, an error message box is displayed.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocument::OnSaveModified}
|
||||
@ -336,11 +336,11 @@ framework.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocument::SetFilename}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFilename}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}, \param{bool}{ notifyViews = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFilename}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}, \param{bool}{ notifyViews = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the filename for this document. Usually called by the framework.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it notifyViews} is TRUE, wxView::OnChangeFilename is called for all views.
|
||||
If {\it notifyViews} is true, wxView::OnChangeFilename is called for all views.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocument::SetTitle}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ have a mask.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDragImage::BeginDrag}\label{wxdragimagebegindrag}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{BeginDrag}{\param{const wxPoint\& }{hotspot}, \param{wxWindow* }{window}, \param{bool}{ fullScreen = FALSE}, \param{wxRect*}{ rect = NULL}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{BeginDrag}{\param{const wxPoint\& }{hotspot}, \param{wxWindow* }{window}, \param{bool}{ fullScreen = false}, \param{wxRect*}{ rect = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Start dragging the image, in a window or full screen.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -133,12 +133,12 @@ Note that this call automatically calls CaptureMouse.
|
||||
of the image.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{window}{The window that captures the mouse, and within which the dragging
|
||||
is limited unless {\it fullScreen} is TRUE.}
|
||||
is limited unless {\it fullScreen} is true.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{boundingWindow}{In the second form of the function, specifies the
|
||||
area within which the drag occurs.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{fullScreen}{If TRUE, specifies that the drag will be visible over the full
|
||||
\docparam{fullScreen}{If true, specifies that the drag will be visible over the full
|
||||
screen, or over as much of the screen as is specified by {\it rect}. Note that the mouse will
|
||||
still be captured in {\it window}.}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -106,10 +106,10 @@ slow.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{effect}{The effect to implement. One of wxDragCopy, wxDragMove and wxDragNone. }
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{scrolling}{TRUE if the window is scrolling. MSW only. }
|
||||
\docparam{scrolling}{true if the window is scrolling. MSW only. }
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Return FALSE if you want default feedback, or TRUE if you implement your own
|
||||
Return false if you want default feedback, or true if you implement your own
|
||||
feedback. The return values is ignored under GTK.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ calling its \helpref{wxDataObject::SetData}{wxdataobjectsetdata} method.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual wxDragResult}{OnData}{\param{wxCoord}{ x}, \param{wxCoord}{ y}, \param{wxDragResult}{ def}}
|
||||
|
||||
Called after \helpref{OnDrop}{wxdroptargetondrop} returns TRUE. By default this
|
||||
Called after \helpref{OnDrop}{wxdroptargetondrop} returns true. By default this
|
||||
will usually \helpref{GetData}{wxdroptargetgetdata} and will return the suggested
|
||||
default value {\it def}.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ default value {\it def}.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{OnDrop}{\param{wxCoord }{x}, \param{wxCoord }{y}}
|
||||
|
||||
Called when the user drops a data object on the target. Return FALSE to veto the operation.
|
||||
Called when the user drops a data object on the target. Return false to veto the operation.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Called when the user drops a data object on the target. Return FALSE to veto the
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Return TRUE to accept the data, FALSE to veto the operation.
|
||||
Return true to accept the data, false to veto the operation.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDropTarget::OnEnter}\label{wxdroptargetonenter}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Constructor. Second form calls \helpref{Load}{wxdynamiclibraryload}.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsLoaded}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the library was successfully loaded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the library was successfully loaded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDynamicLibrary::Load}\label{wxdynamiclibraryload}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the library was successfully loaded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
Loads DLL into memory.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the library was successfully loaded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the library was successfully loaded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDynamicLibrary::Unload}\label{wxdynamiclibraryunload}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ as input string.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
FALSE if given conversion is impossible, TRUE otherwise
|
||||
false if given conversion is impossible, true otherwise
|
||||
(conversion may be impossible either if you try to convert
|
||||
to Unicode with non-Unicode build of wxWindows or if input
|
||||
or output encoding is not supported.)
|
||||
|
@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Identifier for the window.
|
||||
|
||||
\member{bool}{m\_skipped}
|
||||
|
||||
Set to TRUE by {\bf Skip} if this event should be skipped.
|
||||
Set to true by {\bf Skip} if this event should be skipped.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxEvent::m\_timeStamp}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Returns the identifier associated with this event, such as a button command id.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetSkipped}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the event handler should be skipped, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the event handler should be skipped, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxEvent::GetTimestamp}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Sets the originating object.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxEvent::Skip}\label{wxeventskip}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Skip}{\param{bool}{ skip = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{Skip}{\param{bool}{ skip = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Called by an event handler to tell the event system that the
|
||||
event handler should be skipped, and the next valid handler used
|
||||
|
@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ is an alternative to the use of static event tables. See the 'dynamic' sample fo
|
||||
\param{wxObject*}{ userData = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Disconnects the given function dynamically from the event handler, using the specified
|
||||
parameters as search criteria and returning TRUE if a matching function has been
|
||||
parameters as search criteria and returning true if a matching function has been
|
||||
found and removed. This method can only disconnect functions which have been added
|
||||
using the \helpref{wxEvtHandler::Connect}{wxevthandlerconnect} method. There is no way
|
||||
to disconnect functions connected using the (static) event tables.
|
||||
@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Get a pointer to the user-supplied client data object.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetEvtHandlerEnabled}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the event handler is enabled, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the event handler is enabled, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Processes an event, searching event tables and calling zero or more suitable eve
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if a suitable event handler function was found and executed, and the function did not
|
||||
true if a suitable event handler function was found and executed, and the function did not
|
||||
call \helpref{wxEvent::Skip}{wxeventskip}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
@ -227,14 +227,14 @@ The normal order of event table searching is as follows:
|
||||
\item If the object is disabled (via a call to \helpref{wxEvtHandler::SetEvtHandlerEnabled}{wxevthandlersetevthandlerenabled})
|
||||
the function skips to step (6).
|
||||
\item If the object is a wxWindow, {\bf ProcessEvent} is recursively called on the window's\rtfsp
|
||||
\helpref{wxValidator}{wxvalidator}. If this returns TRUE, the function exits.
|
||||
\helpref{wxValidator}{wxvalidator}. If this returns true, the function exits.
|
||||
\item {\bf SearchEventTable} is called for this event handler. If this fails, the base
|
||||
class table is tried, and so on until no more tables exist or an appropriate function was found,
|
||||
in which case the function exits.
|
||||
\item The search is applied down the entire chain of event handlers (usually the chain has a length
|
||||
of one). If this succeeds, the function exits.
|
||||
\item If the object is a wxWindow and the event is a wxCommandEvent, {\bf ProcessEvent} is
|
||||
recursively applied to the parent window's event handler. If this returns TRUE, the function exits.
|
||||
recursively applied to the parent window's event handler. If this returns true, the function exits.
|
||||
\item Finally, {\bf ProcessEvent} is called on the wxApp object.
|
||||
\end{enumerate}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ is found.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if a suitable event handler function was found and executed, and the function did not
|
||||
true if a suitable event handler function was found and executed, and the function did not
|
||||
call \helpref{wxEvent::Skip}{wxeventskip}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Enables or disables the event handler.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{enabled}{TRUE if the event handler is to be enabled, FALSE if it is to be disabled.}
|
||||
\docparam{enabled}{true if the event handler is to be enabled, false if it is to be disabled.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -352,13 +352,13 @@ Construct a new, unhashed database, with an optional error handler. The
|
||||
error handler must be a function returning a bool and taking an integer and a string
|
||||
argument. When an error occurs when reading or writing a database, this function is
|
||||
called. The error is given as the first argument (currently one of WXEXPR\_ERROR\_GENERAL,
|
||||
WXEXPR\_ERROR\_SYNTAX) and an error message is given as the second argument. If FALSE
|
||||
WXEXPR\_ERROR\_SYNTAX) and an error message is given as the second argument. If false
|
||||
is returned by the error handler, processing of the wxExpr operation stops.
|
||||
|
||||
Another way of handling errors is simply to call \helpref{wxExprDatabase::GetErrorCount}{wxexprdatabasegeterrorcount} after
|
||||
the operation, to check whether errors have occurred, instead of installing an error handler.
|
||||
If the error count is more than zero, \helpref{wxExprDatabase::Write}{wxexprdatabasewrite} and
|
||||
\rtfsp\helpref{wxExprDatabase::Read}{wxexprdatabaseread} will return FALSE to
|
||||
\rtfsp\helpref{wxExprDatabase::Read}{wxexprdatabaseread} will return false to
|
||||
the application.
|
||||
|
||||
For example:
|
||||
@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ bool myErrorHandler(int err, chat *msg)
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxMessageBox(msg, "Syntax error");
|
||||
}
|
||||
return FALSE;
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
wxExprDatabase database(myErrorHandler);
|
||||
@ -476,13 +476,13 @@ in the database constructor having the given string value.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\&}{ filename}}
|
||||
|
||||
Reads in the given file, returning TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Reads in the given file, returning true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxExprDatabase::ReadFromString}\label{wxexprdatabasereadfromstring}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{ReadFromString}{\param{const wxString\&}{ buffer}}
|
||||
|
||||
Reads a Prolog database from the given string buffer, returning TRUE if
|
||||
Reads a Prolog database from the given string buffer, returning true if
|
||||
successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxExprDatabase::Write}\label{wxexprdatabasewrite}
|
||||
|
@ -83,14 +83,14 @@ object.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Close}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Closes the file and returns TRUE on success.
|
||||
Closes the file and returns true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFFile::Detach}\label{wxffiledetach}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Detach}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Get back a file pointer from wxFFile object - the caller is responsible for closing the file if this
|
||||
descriptor is opened. \helpref{IsOpened()}{wxffileisopened} will return FALSE after call to Detach().
|
||||
descriptor is opened. \helpref{IsOpened()}{wxffileisopened} will return false after call to Detach().
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFFile::fp}\label{wxffilefp}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -102,25 +102,25 @@ Returns the file pointer associated with the file.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Eof}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the an attempt has been made to read {\it past}
|
||||
Returns true if the an attempt has been made to read {\it past}
|
||||
the end of the file.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that the behaviour of the file descriptor based class
|
||||
\helpref{wxFile}{wxfile} is different as \helpref{wxFile::Eof}{wxfileeof}
|
||||
will return TRUE here as soon as the last byte of the file has been
|
||||
will return true here as soon as the last byte of the file has been
|
||||
read.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFFile::Flush}\label{wxffileflush}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Flush}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Flushes the file and returns TRUE on success.
|
||||
Flushes the file and returns true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFFile::IsOpened}\label{wxffileisopened}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOpened}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the file has been opened.
|
||||
Returns true if the file has been opened.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFFile::Length}\label{wxffilelength}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Returns the length of the file.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const char*}{ filename}, \param{const char*}{ mode = "r"}}
|
||||
|
||||
Opens the file, returning TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Opens the file, returning true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ The number of bytes read.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Seek}{\param{long }{ofs}, \param{wxSeekMode }{mode = wxFromStart}}
|
||||
|
||||
Seeks to the specified position and returns TRUE on success.
|
||||
Seeks to the specified position and returns true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Seeks to the specified position and returns TRUE on success.
|
||||
\func{bool}{SeekEnd}{\param{long }{ofs = 0}}
|
||||
|
||||
Moves the file pointer to the specified number of bytes before the end of the file
|
||||
and returns TRUE on success.
|
||||
and returns true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Number of bytes written.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{s}, \param{wxMBConv\&}{ conv = wxConvLibc}}
|
||||
|
||||
Writes the contents of the string to the file, returns TRUE on success.
|
||||
Writes the contents of the string to the file, returns true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
The second argument is only meaningful in Unicode build of wxWindows when
|
||||
{\it conv} is used to convert {\it s} to multibyte representation.
|
||||
|
@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Destructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the stream is initialized and ready.
|
||||
Returns true if the stream is initialized and ready.
|
||||
|
||||
% -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
% wxFFileOutputStream
|
||||
@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Destructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the stream is initialized and ready.
|
||||
Returns true if the stream is initialized and ready.
|
||||
|
||||
% -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
% wxFFileStream
|
||||
|
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Override this function to receive dropped files.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Return TRUE to accept the data, FALSE to veto the operation.
|
||||
Return true to accept the data, false to veto the operation.
|
||||
|
||||
% VZ: this clarification is probably not needed any longer?
|
||||
%\perlnote{In wxPerl there is just an array reference in place of {\tt nFiles}
|
||||
|
@ -141,9 +141,9 @@ Closes the file.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFile::Create}\label{wxfilecreate}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{const char*}{ filename}, \param{bool}{ overwrite = FALSE}, \param{int }{access = wxS\_DEFAULT}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{const char*}{ filename}, \param{bool}{ overwrite = false}, \param{int }{access = wxS\_DEFAULT}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a file for writing. If the file already exists, setting {\bf overwrite} to TRUE
|
||||
Creates a file for writing. If the file already exists, setting {\bf overwrite} to true
|
||||
will ensure it is overwritten.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFile::Detach}\label{wxfiledetach}
|
||||
@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ will ensure it is overwritten.
|
||||
\func{void}{Detach}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Get back a file descriptor from wxFile object - the caller is responsible for closing the file if this
|
||||
descriptor is opened. \helpref{IsOpened()}{wxfileisopened} will return FALSE after call to Detach().
|
||||
descriptor is opened. \helpref{IsOpened()}{wxfileisopened} will return false after call to Detach().
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFile::fd}\label{wxfilefd}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -163,12 +163,12 @@ Returns the file descriptor associated with the file.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Eof}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the end of the file has been reached.
|
||||
Returns true if the end of the file has been reached.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that the behaviour of the file pointer based class
|
||||
\helpref{wxFFile}{wxffile} is different as \helpref{wxFFile::Eof}{wxffileeof}
|
||||
will return TRUE here only if an attempt has been made to read
|
||||
{\it past} the last byte of the file, while wxFile::Eof() will return TRUE
|
||||
will return true here only if an attempt has been made to read
|
||||
{\it past} the last byte of the file, while wxFile::Eof() will return true
|
||||
even before such attempt is made if the file pointer is at the last position
|
||||
in the file.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ of using Eof() as this will not work for special files under Unix.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{static bool}{Exists}{\param{const char*}{ filename}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the given name specifies an existing regular file (not a
|
||||
Returns true if the given name specifies an existing regular file (not a
|
||||
directory or a link)
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFile::Flush}\label{wxfileflush}
|
||||
@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ due to a missing fsync function, which reduces the usefulness of this function
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOpened}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the file has been opened.
|
||||
Returns true if the file has been opened.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFile::Length}\label{wxfilelength}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Returns the length of the file.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const char*}{ filename}, \param{wxFile::OpenMode}{ mode = wxFile::read}}
|
||||
|
||||
Opens the file, returning TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Opens the file, returning true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ the number of bytes actually written
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{s}, \param{wxMBConv\&}{ conv = wxConvLibc}}
|
||||
|
||||
Writes the contents of the string to the file, returns TRUE on success.
|
||||
Writes the contents of the string to the file, returns true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
The second argument is only meaningful in Unicode build of wxWindows when
|
||||
{\it conv} is used to convert {\it s} to multibyte representation.
|
||||
|
@ -54,5 +54,5 @@ Destructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the stream is initialized and ready.
|
||||
Returns true if the stream is initialized and ready.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -58,5 +58,5 @@ Destructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the stream is initialized and ready.
|
||||
Returns true if the stream is initialized and ready.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -53,33 +53,33 @@ care about it.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFileSystem::ChangePathTo}\label{wxfilesystemchangepathto}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{ChangePathTo}{\param{const wxString\& }{location}, \param{bool }{is\_dir = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{ChangePathTo}{\param{const wxString\& }{location}, \param{bool }{is\_dir = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the current location. {\it location} parameter passed to
|
||||
\helpref{OpenFile}{wxfilesystemopenfile} is relative to this path.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf Caution! } Unless {\it is\_dir} is TRUE the {\it location} parameter
|
||||
{\bf Caution! } Unless {\it is\_dir} is true the {\it location} parameter
|
||||
is not the directory name but the name of the file in this directory. All these
|
||||
commands change the path to "dir/subdir/":
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
ChangePathTo("dir/subdir/xh.htm");
|
||||
ChangePathTo("dir/subdir", TRUE);
|
||||
C hangePathTo("dir/subdir/", TRUE);
|
||||
ChangePathTo("dir/subdir", true);
|
||||
C hangePathTo("dir/subdir/", true);
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{location}{the new location. Its meaning depends on the value of {\it is\_dir}}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{is\_dir}{if TRUE {\it location} is new directory. If FALSE (default)
|
||||
\docparam{is\_dir}{if true {\it location} is new directory. If false (default)
|
||||
{\it location} is {\bf file in} the new directory.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Example}
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
f = fs -> OpenFile("hello.htm"); // opens file 'hello.htm'
|
||||
fs -> ChangePathTo("subdir/folder", TRUE);
|
||||
fs -> ChangePathTo("subdir/folder", true);
|
||||
f = fs -> OpenFile("hello.htm"); // opens file 'subdir/folder/hello.htm' !!
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{CanOpen}{\param{const wxString\& }{location}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the handler is able to open this file. This function doesn't
|
||||
Returns true if the handler is able to open this file. This function doesn't
|
||||
check whether the file exists or not, it only checks if it knows the protocol.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Works like \helpref{wxFindFirstFile}{wxfindfirstfile}. Returns name of the first
|
||||
filename (within filesystem's current path) that matches {\it wildcard}. {\it flags} may be one of
|
||||
wxFILE (only files), wxDIR (only directories) or 0 (both).
|
||||
|
||||
This method is only called if \helpref{CanOpen}{wxfilesystemhandlercanopen} returns TRUE.
|
||||
This method is only called if \helpref{CanOpen}{wxfilesystemhandlercanopen} returns true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFileSystemHandler::FindNext}\label{wxfilesystemhandlerfindnext}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ This method is only called if \helpref{CanOpen}{wxfilesystemhandlercanopen} retu
|
||||
|
||||
Returns next filename that matches parameters passed to \helpref{FindFirst}{wxfilesystemfindfirst}.
|
||||
|
||||
This method is only called if \helpref{CanOpen}{wxfilesystemhandlercanopen} returns TRUE and FindFirst
|
||||
This method is only called if \helpref{CanOpen}{wxfilesystemhandlercanopen} returns true and FindFirst
|
||||
returned a non-empty string.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFileSystemHandler::OpenFile}\label{wxfilesystemhandleropenfile}
|
||||
|
@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ object may be created in several different ways: the program might know the file
|
||||
extension and wish to find out the corresponding MIME type or, conversely, it
|
||||
might want to find the right extension for the file to which it writes the
|
||||
contents of given MIME type. Depending on how it was created some fields may be
|
||||
unknown so the return value of all the accessors {\bf must} be checked: {\tt FALSE}
|
||||
unknown so the return value of all the accessors {\bf must} be checked: {\tt false}
|
||||
will be returned if the corresponding information couldn't be found.
|
||||
|
||||
The objects of this class are never created by the application code but are
|
||||
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ The destructor of this class is not virtual, so it should not be derived from.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetMimeType}{\param{wxString*}{ mimeType}}
|
||||
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt TRUE}, the string pointed to by {\it mimeType} is filled
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt true}, the string pointed to by {\it mimeType} is filled
|
||||
with full MIME type specification for this file type: for example, "text/plain".
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFileType::GetMimeTypes}\label{wxfiletypegetmimetypes}
|
||||
@ -139,14 +139,14 @@ mime.types.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetExtensions}{\param{wxArrayString\&}{ extensions}}
|
||||
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt TRUE}, the array {\it extensions} is filled
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt true}, the array {\it extensions} is filled
|
||||
with all extensions associated with this file type: for example, it may
|
||||
contain the following two elements for the MIME type "text/html" (notice the
|
||||
absence of the leading dot): "html" and "htm".
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf Windows:} This function is currently not implemented: there is no
|
||||
(efficient) way to retrieve associated extensions from the given MIME type on
|
||||
this platform, so it will only return {\tt TRUE} if the wxFileType object was created
|
||||
this platform, so it will only return {\tt true} if the wxFileType object was created
|
||||
by \helpref{GetFileTypeFromExtension}{wxmimetypesmanagergetfiletypefromextension}
|
||||
function in the first place.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ function in the first place.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetIcon}{\param{wxIcon*}{ icon}}
|
||||
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt TRUE}, the icon associated with this file type will be
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt true}, the icon associated with this file type will be
|
||||
created and assigned to the {\it icon} parameter.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf Unix:} MIME manager gathers information about icons from GNOME
|
||||
@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ of these desktop environments.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetDescription}{\param{wxString*}{ desc}}
|
||||
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt TRUE}, the string pointed to by {\it desc} is filled
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt true}, the string pointed to by {\it desc} is filled
|
||||
with a brief description for this file type: for example, "text document" for
|
||||
the "text/plain" MIME type.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ the "text/plain" MIME type.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxString}{GetOpenCommand}{\param{const wxString\&}{ filename}}
|
||||
|
||||
With the first version of this method, if the {\tt TRUE} is returned, the
|
||||
With the first version of this method, if the {\tt true} is returned, the
|
||||
string pointed to by {\it command} is filled with the command which must be
|
||||
executed (see \helpref{wxExecute}{wxexecute}) in order to open the file of the
|
||||
given type. In this case, the name of the file as well as any other parameters
|
||||
@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ to open this kind of files).
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetPrintCommand}{\param{wxString*}{ command},\param{MessageParameters\&}{ params}}
|
||||
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt TRUE}, the string pointed to by {\it command} is filled
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt true}, the string pointed to by {\it command} is filled
|
||||
with the command which must be executed (see \helpref{wxExecute}{wxexecute}) in
|
||||
order to print the file of the given type. The name of the file is
|
||||
retrieved from \helpref{MessageParameters}{wxfiletypemessageparameters} class.
|
||||
|
@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ wxSWISS\_FONT}
|
||||
Default constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxFont}{\param{int}{ pointSize}, \param{int}{ family}, \param{int}{ style}, \param{int}{ weight},
|
||||
\param{const bool}{ underline = FALSE}, \param{const wxString\& }{faceName = ""},
|
||||
\param{const bool}{ underline = false}, \param{const wxString\& }{faceName = ""},
|
||||
\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding = wxFONTENCODING\_DEFAULT}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a font object (see \helpref{font encoding
|
||||
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ overview}{wxfontencodingoverview} for the meaning of the last parameter).
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{weight}{One of {\bf wxNORMAL}, {\bf wxLIGHT} and {\bf wxBOLD}.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{underline}{The value can be TRUE or FALSE. At present this has an effect on Windows only.}
|
||||
\docparam{underline}{The value can be true or false. At present this has an effect on Windows only.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{faceName}{An optional string specifying the actual typeface to be used. If the empty string,
|
||||
a default typeface will chosen based on the family.}
|
||||
@ -204,8 +204,8 @@ application data structure, and there is a risk of double deletion.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsFixedWidth}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the font is a fixed width (or monospaced) font,
|
||||
{\tt FALSE} if it is a proportional one or font is invalid.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the font is a fixed width (or monospaced) font,
|
||||
{\tt false} if it is a proportional one or font is invalid.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFont::GetDefaultEncoding}\label{wxfontgetdefaultencoding}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ styles.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetUnderlined}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the font is underlined, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the font is underlined, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ weight identifiers.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this object is a valid font, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if this object is a valid font, {\tt false} otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFont::SetDefaultEncoding}\label{wxfontsetdefaultencoding}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ Sets underlining.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{underlining}{TRUE to underline, FALSE otherwise.}
|
||||
\docparam{underlining}{true to underline, false otherwise.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ This class holds a variety of information related to font dialogs.
|
||||
\func{}{wxFontData}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor. Initializes {\it fontColour} to black, {\it showHelp} to black,
|
||||
\rtfsp{\it allowSymbols} to TRUE, {\it enableEffects} to TRUE,
|
||||
\rtfsp{\it allowSymbols} to true, {\it enableEffects} to true,
|
||||
\rtfsp{\it minSize} to 0 and {\it maxSize} to 0.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontData::\destruct{wxFontData}}
|
||||
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Destructor.
|
||||
Enables or disables `effects' under MS Windows only. This refers to the
|
||||
controls for manipulating colour, strikeout and underline properties.
|
||||
|
||||
The default value is TRUE.
|
||||
The default value is true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontData::GetAllowSymbols}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ The default value is TRUE.
|
||||
Under MS Windows, returns a flag determining whether symbol fonts can be selected. Has no
|
||||
effect on other platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
The default value is TRUE.
|
||||
The default value is true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontData::GetColour}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -62,9 +62,9 @@ The default value is black.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxFont}{GetChosenFont}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the font chosen by the user. If the user pressed OK (wxFontDialog::Show returned TRUE), this returns
|
||||
Gets the font chosen by the user. If the user pressed OK (wxFontDialog::Show returned true), this returns
|
||||
a new font which is now `owned' by the application, and should be deleted
|
||||
if not required. If the user pressed Cancel (wxFontDialog::Show returned FALSE) or
|
||||
if not required. If the user pressed Cancel (wxFontDialog::Show returned false) or
|
||||
the colour dialog has not been invoked yet, this will return NULL.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontData::GetEnableEffects}
|
||||
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ the colour dialog has not been invoked yet, this will return NULL.
|
||||
Determines whether `effects' are enabled under Windows. This refers to the
|
||||
controls for manipulating colour, strikeout and underline properties.
|
||||
|
||||
The default value is TRUE.
|
||||
The default value is true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontData::GetInitialFont}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -87,9 +87,9 @@ previously been set by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetShowHelp}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Help button will be shown (Windows only).
|
||||
Returns true if the Help button will be shown (Windows only).
|
||||
|
||||
The default value is FALSE.
|
||||
The default value is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontData::SetAllowSymbols}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ The default value is FALSE.
|
||||
Under MS Windows, determines whether symbol fonts can be selected. Has no
|
||||
effect on other platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
The default value is TRUE.
|
||||
The default value is true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontData::SetChosenFont}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ The default is 0, 0 (unrestricted range).
|
||||
|
||||
Determines whether the Help button will be displayed in the font dialog (Windows only).
|
||||
|
||||
The default value is FALSE.
|
||||
The default value is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontData::operator $=$}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ shown.
|
||||
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{const wxFontData\& }{data}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates the dialog if it the wxFontDialog object had been initialized using the
|
||||
default constructor. Returns {\tt TRUE} on success and {\tt FALSE} if an error
|
||||
default constructor. Returns {\tt true} on success and {\tt false} if an error
|
||||
occured.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontDialog::\destruct{wxFontDialog}}
|
||||
|
@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ To do this, you just have to call one of EnumerateXXX() functions - either
|
||||
corresponding callback (\helpref{OnFacename}{wxfontenumeratoronfacename} or
|
||||
\helpref{OnFontEncoding}{wxfontenumeratoronfontencoding}) will be called
|
||||
repeatedly until either all fonts satisfying the specified criteria are
|
||||
exhausted or the callback returns FALSE.
|
||||
exhausted or the callback returns false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Virtual functions to override}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -54,11 +54,11 @@ None
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{EnumerateFacenames}{
|
||||
\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding = wxFONTENCODING\_SYSTEM},
|
||||
\param{bool }{fixedWidthOnly = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{bool }{fixedWidthOnly = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Call \helpref{OnFacename}{wxfontenumeratoronfacename} for each font which
|
||||
supports given encoding (only if it is not wxFONTENCODING\_SYSTEM) and is of
|
||||
fixed width (if {\it fixedWidthOnly} is TRUE).
|
||||
fixed width (if {\it fixedWidthOnly} is true).
|
||||
|
||||
Calling this function with default arguments will result in enumerating all
|
||||
fonts available on the system.
|
||||
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ it to work if you overwrite that method.
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{OnFacename}{\param{const wxString\& }{font}}
|
||||
|
||||
Called by \helpref{EnumerateFacenames}{wxfontenumeratorenumeratefacenames} for
|
||||
each match. Return TRUE to continue enumeration or FALSE to stop it.
|
||||
each match. Return true to continue enumeration or false to stop it.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontEnumerator::OnFontEncoding}\label{wxfontenumeratoronfontencoding}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -106,5 +106,5 @@ each match. Return TRUE to continue enumeration or FALSE to stop it.
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Called by \helpref{EnumerateEncodings}{wxfontenumeratorenumerateencodings} for
|
||||
each match. Return TRUE to continue enumeration or FALSE to stop it.
|
||||
each match. Return true to continue enumeration or false to stop it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Used by wxWindows to add a font to the list, called in the font constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontList::FindOrCreateFont}\label{findorcreatefont}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxFont *}{FindOrCreateFont}{\param{int}{ point\_size}, \param{int}{ family}, \param{int}{ style}, \param{int}{ weight}, \param{bool}{ underline = FALSE},
|
||||
\func{wxFont *}{FindOrCreateFont}{\param{int}{ point\_size}, \param{int}{ family}, \param{int}{ style}, \param{int}{ weight}, \param{bool}{ underline = false},
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{facename = NULL}, \param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding = wxFONTENCODING\_DEFAULT}{}}
|
||||
|
||||
Finds a font of the given specification, or creates one and adds it to the list. See the \helpref{wxFont constructor}{wxfontconstr} for
|
||||
|
@ -11,15 +11,15 @@ names and the fonts present on the machine.
|
||||
The default implementations of all functions will ask the user if they are
|
||||
not capable of finding the answer themselves and store the answer in a
|
||||
config file (configurable via SetConfigXXX functions). This behaviour may
|
||||
be disabled by giving the value of FALSE to "interactive" parameter.
|
||||
be disabled by giving the value of false to "interactive" parameter.
|
||||
|
||||
However, the functions will always consult the config file to allow the
|
||||
user-defined values override the default logic and there is no way to
|
||||
disable this - which shouldn't be ever needed because if "interactive" was
|
||||
never TRUE, the config file is never created anyhow.
|
||||
never true, the config file is never created anyhow.
|
||||
|
||||
In case everything else fails (i.e. there is no record in config file
|
||||
and "interactive" is FALSE or user denied to choose any replacement),
|
||||
and "interactive" is false or user denied to choose any replacement),
|
||||
the class queries \helpref{wxEncodingConverter}{wxencodingconverter}
|
||||
for "equivalent" encodings (e.g. iso8859-2 and cp1250) and tries them.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ if (!wxFontMapper::Get()->IsEncodingAvailable(enc, facename))
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxFontEncoding alternative;
|
||||
if (wxFontMapper::Get()->GetAltForEncoding(enc, &alternative,
|
||||
facename, FALSE))
|
||||
facename, false))
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxEncodingConverter encconv;
|
||||
if (!encconv.Init(enc, alternative))
|
||||
@ -99,14 +99,14 @@ one.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontMapper::GetAltForEncoding}\label{wxfontmappergetaltforencoding}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetAltForEncoding}{\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding}, \param{wxNativeEncodingInfo* }{info}, \param{const wxString\& }{facename = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{interactive = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetAltForEncoding}{\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding}, \param{wxNativeEncodingInfo* }{info}, \param{const wxString\& }{facename = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{interactive = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetAltForEncoding}{\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding}, \param{wxFontEncoding* }{alt\_encoding}, \param{const wxString\& }{facename = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{interactive = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetAltForEncoding}{\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding}, \param{wxFontEncoding* }{alt\_encoding}, \param{const wxString\& }{facename = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{interactive = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Find an alternative for the given encoding (which is supposed to not be
|
||||
available on this system). If successful, return TRUE and fill info
|
||||
available on this system). If successful, return true and fill info
|
||||
structure with the parameters required to create the font, otherwise
|
||||
return FALSE.
|
||||
return false.
|
||||
|
||||
The first form is for wxWindows' internal use while the second one
|
||||
is better suitable for general use -- it returns wxFontEncoding which
|
||||
@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ If no facename is given, find {\it any} font in this encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFontMapper::CharsetToEncoding}\label{wxfontmappercharsettoencoding}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxFontEncoding}{CharsetToEncoding}{\param{const wxString\& }{charset}, \param{bool }{interactive = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{wxFontEncoding}{CharsetToEncoding}{\param{const wxString\& }{charset}, \param{bool }{interactive = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the encoding for the given charset (in the form of RFC 2046) or
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING\_SYSTEM if couldn't decode it.
|
||||
|
@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Iconizes or restores the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{iconize}{If TRUE, iconizes the frame; if FALSE, shows and restores it.}
|
||||
\docparam{iconize}{If true, iconizes the frame; if false, shows and restores it.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Iconizes or restores the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsFullScreen}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the frame is in fullscreen mode.
|
||||
Returns true if the frame is in fullscreen mode.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -333,13 +333,13 @@ Returns TRUE if the frame is in fullscreen mode.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsIconized}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the frame is iconized.
|
||||
Returns true if the frame is iconized.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFrame::IsMaximized}\label{wxframeismaximized}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsMaximized}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the frame is maximized.
|
||||
Returns true if the frame is maximized.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFrame::Maximize}\label{wxframemaximize}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Maximizes or restores the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{maximize}{If TRUE, maximizes the frame, otherwise it restores it.}
|
||||
\docparam{maximize}{If true, maximizes the frame, otherwise it restores it.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ Sets the frame title.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{ShowFullScreen}{\param{bool}{ show}, \param{long}{ style = wxFULLSCREEN\_ALL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Passing TRUE to {\it shows} shows the frame full-screen, and passing FALSE restores the frame
|
||||
Passing true to {\it shows} shows the frame full-screen, and passing false restores the frame
|
||||
again. {\it style} is a bit list containing some or all of the following values, which
|
||||
indicate what elements of the frame to hide in full-screen mode:
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Destructor will close the connection if connected.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Abort}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Aborts the download currently in process, returns {\tt TRUE} if ok, {\tt FALSE}
|
||||
Aborts the download currently in process, returns {\tt true} if ok, {\tt false}
|
||||
if an error occured.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFTP::CheckCommand}
|
||||
@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ the expected result.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the command has been sent successfully, else FALSE.
|
||||
true if the command has been sent successfully, else false.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFTP::SendCommand}\label{wxftpsendcommand}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -154,21 +154,21 @@ command.
|
||||
\func{bool}{ChDir}{\param{const wxString\&}{ dir}}
|
||||
|
||||
Change the current FTP working directory.
|
||||
Returns TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Returns true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFTP::MkDir}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{MkDir}{\param{const wxString\&}{ dir}}
|
||||
|
||||
Create the specified directory in the current FTP working directory.
|
||||
Returns TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Returns true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFTP::RmDir}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{RmDir}{\param{const wxString\&}{ dir}}
|
||||
|
||||
Remove the specified directory from the current FTP working directory.
|
||||
Returns TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Returns true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFTP::Pwd}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Returns the current FTP working directory.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Rename}{\param{const wxString\&}{ src}, \param{const wxString\&}{ dst}}
|
||||
|
||||
Rename the specified {\it src} element to {\it dst}. Returns TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Rename the specified {\it src} element to {\it dst}. Returns true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Rename the specified {\it src} element to {\it dst}. Returns TRUE if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{RmFile}{\param{const wxString\&}{ path}}
|
||||
|
||||
Delete the file specified by {\it path}. Returns TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Delete the file specified by {\it path}. Returns true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ to specify a user and a password.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{FileExists}{\param{const wxString\&}{ filename}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the given remote file exists, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the given remote file exists, {\tt false} otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFTP::GetFileSize}\label{wxftpgetfilesize}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ winamp~1 exe 520196 02-25-1999 19:28 winamp204.exe
|
||||
1 file(s) 520 196 bytes
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
Return value: TRUE if the file list was successfully retrieved, FALSE
|
||||
Return value: true if the file list was successfully retrieved, false
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ directory (optionally only of the files matching the {\it wildcard}, all files
|
||||
by default). This list always has the same format and contains one full
|
||||
(including the directory path) file name per line.
|
||||
|
||||
Return value: TRUE if the file list was successfully retrieved, FALSE
|
||||
Return value: true if the file list was successfully retrieved, false
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
@ -305,9 +305,9 @@ you can initialize wxWindows from an Microsoft Foundation Classes application us
|
||||
this function.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{wxEntry}{\param{HANDLE}{ hInstance}, \param{HANDLE}{ hPrevInstance},
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{commandLine}, \param{int}{ cmdShow}, \param{bool}{ enterLoop = TRUE}}
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{commandLine}, \param{int}{ cmdShow}, \param{bool}{ enterLoop = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
wxWindows initialization under Windows (non-DLL). If {\it enterLoop} is FALSE, the
|
||||
wxWindows initialization under Windows (non-DLL). If {\it enterLoop} is false, the
|
||||
function will return immediately after calling wxApp::OnInit. Otherwise, the wxWindows
|
||||
message loop will be entered.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -342,14 +342,14 @@ int CTheApp::ExitInstance()
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxHandleFatalExceptions}\label{wxhandlefatalexceptions}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxHandleFatalExceptions}{\param{bool}{ doIt = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxHandleFatalExceptions}{\param{bool}{ doIt = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it doIt} is TRUE, the fatal exceptions (also known as general protection
|
||||
If {\it doIt} is true, the fatal exceptions (also known as general protection
|
||||
faults under Windows or segmentation violations in the Unix world) will be
|
||||
caught and passed to \helpref{wxApp::OnFatalException}{wxapponfatalexception}.
|
||||
By default, i.e. before this function is called, they will be handled in the
|
||||
normal way which usually just means that the application will be terminated.
|
||||
Calling wxHandleFatalExceptions() with {\it doIt} equal to FALSE will restore
|
||||
Calling wxHandleFatalExceptions() with {\it doIt} equal to false will restore
|
||||
this default behaviour.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxInitAllImageHandlers}\label{wxinitallimagehandlers}
|
||||
@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ This function is used in wxBase only and only if you don't create
|
||||
\helpref{wxApp}{wxapp} object at all. In this case you must call it from your
|
||||
{\tt main()} function before calling any other wxWindows functions.
|
||||
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt FALSE} the initialization could not be performed,
|
||||
If the function returns {\tt false} the initialization could not be performed,
|
||||
in this case the library cannot be used and
|
||||
\helpref{wxUninitialize}{wxuninitialize} shouldn't be called neither.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ call to this function.
|
||||
\membersection{::wxSafeYield}\label{wxsafeyield}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxSafeYield}{\param{wxWindow*}{ win = NULL}, \param{bool}{
|
||||
onlyIfNeeded = FALSE}}
|
||||
onlyIfNeeded = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function is similar to wxYield, except that it disables the user input to
|
||||
all program windows before calling wxYield and re-enables it again
|
||||
@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ $-1$ if the process couldn't be started and typically 0 if the process
|
||||
terminated successfully. Also, while waiting for the process to
|
||||
terminate, wxExecute will call \helpref{wxYield}{wxyield}. The caller
|
||||
should ensure that this can cause no recursion, in the simplest case by
|
||||
calling \helpref{wxEnableTopLevelWindows(FALSE)}{wxenabletoplevelwindows}.
|
||||
calling \helpref{wxEnableTopLevelWindows(false)}{wxenabletoplevelwindows}.
|
||||
|
||||
For asynchronous execution, however, the return value is the process id and
|
||||
zero value indicates that the command could not be executed. As an added
|
||||
@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ and that this function is only implemented under Unix and Win32.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Returns}
|
||||
|
||||
{\tt TRUE} on success, {\tt FALSE} if an error occured.
|
||||
{\tt true} on success, {\tt false} if an error occured.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -722,7 +722,7 @@ threads.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxDirExists}{\param{const wxString\& }{dirname}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the directory exists.
|
||||
Returns true if the directory exists.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxDos2UnixFilename}\label{wxdos2unixfilename}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -735,7 +735,7 @@ slashes.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxFileExists}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the file exists. It also returns TRUE if the file is
|
||||
Returns true if the file exists. It also returns true if the file is
|
||||
a directory.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxFileModificationTime}\label{wxfilemodificationtime}
|
||||
@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ information is not needed.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Returns}
|
||||
|
||||
{\tt TRUE} on success, {\tt FALSE} if an error occured (for example, the
|
||||
{\tt true} on success, {\tt false} if an error occured (for example, the
|
||||
directory doesn't exist).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Portability}
|
||||
@ -819,7 +819,7 @@ Returns the Windows directory under Windows; on other platforms returns the empt
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxIsAbsolutePath}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the argument is an absolute filename, i.e. with a slash
|
||||
Returns true if the argument is an absolute filename, i.e. with a slash
|
||||
or drive name at the beginning.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxPathOnly}\label{wxpathonly}
|
||||
@ -841,15 +841,15 @@ slashes with backslashes.
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{file3}}
|
||||
|
||||
Concatenates {\it file1} and {\it file2} to {\it file3}, returning
|
||||
TRUE if successful.
|
||||
true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxCopyFile}\label{wxcopyfile}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxCopyFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{file1}, \param{const wxString\& }{file2}, \param{bool }{overwrite = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxCopyFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{file1}, \param{const wxString\& }{file2}, \param{bool }{overwrite = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Copies {\it file1} to {\it file2}, returning TRUE if successful. If
|
||||
{\it overwrite} parameter is TRUE (default), the destination file is overwritten
|
||||
if it exists, but if {\it overwrite} is FALSE, the functions fails in this
|
||||
Copies {\it file1} to {\it file2}, returning true if successful. If
|
||||
{\it overwrite} parameter is true (default), the destination file is overwritten
|
||||
if it exists, but if {\it overwrite} is false, the functions fails in this
|
||||
case.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxGetCwd}\label{wxgetcwd}
|
||||
@ -894,21 +894,21 @@ instead.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxIsWild}{\param{const wxString\& }{pattern}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the pattern contains wildcards. See \helpref{wxMatchWild}{wxmatchwild}.
|
||||
Returns true if the pattern contains wildcards. See \helpref{wxMatchWild}{wxmatchwild}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxMatchWild}\label{wxmatchwild}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxMatchWild}{\param{const wxString\& }{pattern}, \param{const wxString\& }{text}, \param{bool}{ dot\_special}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the {\it pattern}\/ matches the {\it text}\/; if {\it
|
||||
dot\_special}\/ is TRUE, filenames beginning with a dot are not matched
|
||||
Returns true if the {\it pattern}\/ matches the {\it text}\/; if {\it
|
||||
dot\_special}\/ is true, filenames beginning with a dot are not matched
|
||||
with wildcard characters. See \helpref{wxIsWild}{wxiswild}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxMkdir}\label{wxmkdir}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxMkdir}{\param{const wxString\& }{dir}, \param{int }{perm = 0777}}
|
||||
|
||||
Makes the directory {\it dir}, returning TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Makes the directory {\it dir}, returning true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it perm} is the access mask for the directory for the systems on which it is
|
||||
supported (Unix) and doesn't have effect for the other ones.
|
||||
@ -917,19 +917,19 @@ supported (Unix) and doesn't have effect for the other ones.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxRemoveFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{file}}
|
||||
|
||||
Removes {\it file}, returning TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Removes {\it file}, returning true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxRenameFile}\label{wxrenamefile}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxRenameFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{file1}, \param{const wxString\& }{file2}}
|
||||
|
||||
Renames {\it file1} to {\it file2}, returning TRUE if successful.
|
||||
Renames {\it file1} to {\it file2}, returning true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxRmdir}\label{wxrmdir}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxRmdir}{\param{const wxString\& }{dir}, \param{int}{ flags=0}}
|
||||
|
||||
Removes the directory {\it dir}, returning TRUE if successful. Does not work under VMS.
|
||||
Removes the directory {\it dir}, returning true if successful. Does not work under VMS.
|
||||
|
||||
The {\it flags} parameter is reserved for future use.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ The {\it flags} parameter is reserved for future use.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxSetWorkingDirectory}{\param{const wxString\& }{dir}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the current working directory, returning TRUE if the operation succeeded.
|
||||
Sets the current working directory, returning true if the operation succeeded.
|
||||
Under MS Windows, the current drive is also changed if {\it dir} contains a drive specification.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxSplitPath}\label{wxsplitfunction}
|
||||
@ -1026,7 +1026,7 @@ Copies the user's email address into the supplied buffer, by
|
||||
concatenating the values returned by \helpref{wxGetFullHostName}{wxgetfullhostname}\rtfsp
|
||||
and \helpref{wxGetUserId}{wxgetuserid}.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if successful, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1061,8 +1061,8 @@ variable SYSTEM\_NAME; if this is not found, the entry {\bf HostName}\rtfsp
|
||||
in the {\bf wxWindows} section of the WIN.INI file is tried.
|
||||
|
||||
The first variant of this function returns the hostname if successful or an
|
||||
empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns TRUE
|
||||
if successful, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns true
|
||||
if successful, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1086,8 +1086,8 @@ variables USER and LOGNAME; if neither of these is found, the entry {\bf UserId}
|
||||
in the {\bf wxWindows} section of the WIN.INI file is tried.
|
||||
|
||||
The first variant of this function returns the login name if successful or an
|
||||
empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns TRUE
|
||||
if successful, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns true
|
||||
if successful, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1167,8 +1167,8 @@ is running, the entry {\bf Current} in the section {\bf User} of
|
||||
the PENWIN.INI file is used.
|
||||
|
||||
The first variant of this function returns the user name if successful or an
|
||||
empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns {\tt TRUE}
|
||||
if successful, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
|
||||
empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns {\tt true}
|
||||
if successful, {\tt false} otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1193,8 +1193,8 @@ This function is deprecated, use \helpref{wxString}{wxstring} class instead.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxIsEmpty}{\param{const char *}{ p}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the pointer is either {\tt NULL} or points to an empty
|
||||
string, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the pointer is either {\tt NULL} or points to an empty
|
||||
string, {\tt false} otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxStricmp}\label{wxstricmp}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1209,12 +1209,12 @@ case-sensitive comparison.
|
||||
\membersection{::wxStringMatch}\label{wxstringmatch}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxStringMatch}{\param{const wxString\& }{s1}, \param{const wxString\& }{s2},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ subString = TRUE}, \param{bool}{ exact = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{bool}{ subString = true}, \param{bool}{ exact = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB:} This function is obsolete, use \helpref{wxString::Find}{wxstringfind} instead.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the substring {\it s1} is found within {\it s2},
|
||||
ignoring case if {\it exact} is FALSE. If {\it subString} is {\tt FALSE},
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the substring {\it s1} is found within {\it s2},
|
||||
ignoring case if {\it exact} is false. If {\it subString} is {\tt false},
|
||||
no substring matching is done.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxStringEq}\label{wxstringeq}
|
||||
@ -1479,7 +1479,7 @@ is valid) if the dialog was cancelled.
|
||||
\param{const wxArrayString\& }{aChoices},\\
|
||||
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
|
||||
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = TRUE},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = true},\\
|
||||
\param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{size\_t}{wxGetMultipleChoices}{\\
|
||||
@ -1489,7 +1489,7 @@ is valid) if the dialog was cancelled.
|
||||
\param{int}{ n}, \param{const wxString\& }{choices[]},\\
|
||||
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
|
||||
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = TRUE},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = true},\\
|
||||
\param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
|
||||
Pops up a dialog box containing a message, OK/Cancel buttons and a
|
||||
@ -1502,8 +1502,8 @@ You may pass the list of strings to choose from either using {\it choices}
|
||||
which is an array of {\it n} strings for the listbox or by using a single
|
||||
{\it aChoices} parameter of type \helpref{wxArrayString}{wxarraystring}.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it centre} is TRUE, the message text (which may include new line
|
||||
characters) is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
If {\it centre} is true, the message text (which may include new line
|
||||
characters) is centred; if false, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1557,14 +1557,14 @@ to be used for entering passwords as the function name implies.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxString}{wxGetTextFromUser}{\param{const wxString\& }{message}, \param{const wxString\& }{caption = ``Input text"},\\
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{default\_value = ``"}, \param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
|
||||
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1}, \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}}
|
||||
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1}, \param{bool}{ centre = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Pop up a dialog box with title set to {\it caption}, {\it message}, and a
|
||||
\rtfsp{\it default\_value}. The user may type in text and press OK to return this text,
|
||||
or press Cancel to return the empty string.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it centre} is TRUE, the message text (which may include new line characters)
|
||||
is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
If {\it centre} is true, the message text (which may include new line characters)
|
||||
is centred; if false, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1575,7 +1575,7 @@ is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
\func{int}{wxGetMultipleChoice}{\param{const wxString\& }{message}, \param{const wxString\& }{caption}, \param{int}{ n}, \param{const wxString\& }{choices[]},\\
|
||||
\param{int }{nsel}, \param{int *}{selection},
|
||||
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL}, \param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = true}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
|
||||
Pops up a dialog box containing a message, OK/Cancel buttons and a multiple-selection
|
||||
listbox. The user may choose one or more item(s) and press OK or Cancel.
|
||||
@ -1589,8 +1589,8 @@ If Cancel is pressed, -1 is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it choices} is an array of {\it n} strings for the listbox.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it centre} is TRUE, the message text (which may include new line characters)
|
||||
is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
If {\it centre} is true, the message text (which may include new line characters)
|
||||
is centred; if false, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1603,7 +1603,7 @@ is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
\param{const wxArrayString\& }{aChoices},\\
|
||||
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
|
||||
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = TRUE},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = true},\\
|
||||
\param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxString}{wxGetSingleChoice}{\param{const wxString\& }{message},\\
|
||||
@ -1611,7 +1611,7 @@ is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
\param{int}{ n}, \param{const wxString\& }{choices[]},\\
|
||||
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
|
||||
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = TRUE},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = true},\\
|
||||
\param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
|
||||
Pops up a dialog box containing a message, OK/Cancel buttons and a
|
||||
@ -1624,8 +1624,8 @@ You may pass the list of strings to choose from either using {\it choices}
|
||||
which is an array of {\it n} strings for the listbox or by using a single
|
||||
{\it aChoices} parameter of type \helpref{wxArrayString}{wxarraystring}.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it centre} is TRUE, the message text (which may include new line
|
||||
characters) is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
If {\it centre} is true, the message text (which may include new line
|
||||
characters) is centred; if false, the message is left-justified.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1640,13 +1640,13 @@ and {\tt choices}.}
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{caption},\\
|
||||
\param{const wxArrayString\& }{aChoices},\\
|
||||
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL}, \param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = true}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{wxGetSingleChoiceIndex}{\param{const wxString\& }{message},\\
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{caption},\\
|
||||
\param{int}{ n}, \param{const wxString\& }{choices[]},\\
|
||||
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL}, \param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = true}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
|
||||
As {\bf wxGetSingleChoice} but returns the index representing the selected
|
||||
string. If the user pressed cancel, -1 is returned.
|
||||
@ -1666,7 +1666,7 @@ and {\tt choices}.}
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{client\_data[]},\\
|
||||
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
|
||||
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = true}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxString}{wxGetSingleChoiceData}{\param{const wxString\& }{message},\\
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{caption},\\
|
||||
@ -1674,7 +1674,7 @@ and {\tt choices}.}
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{client\_data[]},\\
|
||||
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
|
||||
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
\param{bool}{ centre = true}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
|
||||
|
||||
As {\bf wxGetSingleChoice} but takes an array of client data pointers
|
||||
corresponding to the strings, and returns one of these pointers or NULL if
|
||||
@ -1693,7 +1693,7 @@ same length as the choices array.}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxIsBusy}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if between two \helpref{wxBeginBusyCursor}{wxbeginbusycursor} and\rtfsp
|
||||
Returns true if between two \helpref{wxBeginBusyCursor}{wxbeginbusycursor} and\rtfsp
|
||||
\helpref{wxEndBusyCursor}{wxendbusycursor} calls.
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{wxBusyCursor}{wxbusycursor}.
|
||||
@ -1753,7 +1753,7 @@ The symbols are not shown when the generic function is used.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxShowTip}{\param{wxWindow *}{parent},
|
||||
\param{wxTipProvider *}{tipProvider},
|
||||
\param{bool }{showAtStartup = TRUE}}
|
||||
\param{bool }{showAtStartup = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function shows a "startup tip" to the user. The return value is the
|
||||
state of the ``Show tips at startup'' checkbox.
|
||||
@ -1763,7 +1763,7 @@ state of the ``Show tips at startup'' checkbox.
|
||||
\docparam{tipProvider}{An object which is used to get the text of the tips.
|
||||
It may be created with the \helpref{wxCreateFileTipProvider}{wxcreatefiletipprovider} function.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{showAtStartup}{Should be TRUE if startup tips are shown, FALSE
|
||||
\docparam{showAtStartup}{Should be true if startup tips are shown, false
|
||||
otherwise. This is used as the initial value for "Show tips at startup"
|
||||
checkbox which is shown in the tips dialog.}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1816,7 +1816,7 @@ provide this info for all window managers, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxColourDisplay}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the display is colour, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the display is colour, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxDisplayDepth}\label{wxdisplaydepth}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2030,7 +2030,7 @@ class instead.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxClipboardOpen}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if this application has already opened the clipboard.
|
||||
Returns true if this application has already opened the clipboard.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxCloseClipboard}\label{wxcloseclipboard}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2090,7 +2090,7 @@ length {\it maxCount}. {\it dataFormat} must not specify a predefined clipboard
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxIsClipboardFormatAvailable}{\param{int}{dataFormat}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the given data format is available on the clipboard.
|
||||
Returns true if the given data format is available on the clipboard.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxOpenClipboard}\label{wxopenclipboard}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2220,7 +2220,7 @@ See also \helpref{wxDDEServer}{wxddeserver}, \helpref{wxDDEClient}{wxddeclient},
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxEnableTopLevelWindows}\label{wxenabletoplevelwindows}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{wxEnableTopLevelWindow}{\param{bool}{ enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{wxEnableTopLevelWindow}{\param{bool}{ enable = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function enables or disables all top level windows. It is used by
|
||||
\helpref{::wxSafeYield}{wxsafeyield}.
|
||||
@ -3388,11 +3388,11 @@ should be used instead. For retrieving the current time, you may also use
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxGetElapsedTime}\label{wxgetelapsedtime}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{wxGetElapsedTime}{\param{bool}{ resetTimer = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{long}{wxGetElapsedTime}{\param{bool}{ resetTimer = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the time in milliseconds since the last \helpref{::wxStartTimer}{wxstarttimer}.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it resetTimer} is TRUE (the default), the timer is reset to zero
|
||||
If {\it resetTimer} is true (the default), the timer is reset to zero
|
||||
by this call.
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{wxTimer}{wxtimer}.
|
||||
@ -3521,7 +3521,7 @@ the global application object exists.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxASSERT}{\param{}{condition}}
|
||||
|
||||
Assert macro. An error message will be generated if the condition is FALSE in
|
||||
Assert macro. An error message will be generated if the condition is false in
|
||||
debug mode, but nothing will be done in the release build.
|
||||
|
||||
Please note that the condition in wxASSERT() should have no side effects
|
||||
@ -3554,7 +3554,7 @@ You may use it like this, for example:
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxASSERT\_MSG}{\param{}{condition}, \param{}{msg}}
|
||||
|
||||
Assert macro with message. An error message will be generated if the condition is FALSE.
|
||||
Assert macro with message. An error message will be generated if the condition is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3707,7 +3707,7 @@ Returns the current value of the environment variable {\it var} in {\it value}.
|
||||
{\it value} may be {\tt NULL} if you just want to know if the variable exists
|
||||
and are not interested in its value.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the variable exists, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the variable exists, {\tt false} otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxSetEnv}\label{wxsetenv}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3716,7 +3716,7 @@ Returns {\tt TRUE} if the variable exists, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
|
||||
Sets the value of the environment variable {\it var} (adding it if necessary)
|
||||
to {\it value}.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} on success.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} on success.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxUnsetEnv}\label{wxunsetenv}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3726,5 +3726,5 @@ Removes the variable {\it var} from the environment.
|
||||
\helpref{wxGetEnv}{wxgetenv} will return {\tt NULL} after the call to this
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} on success.
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} on success.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -117,9 +117,9 @@ table (see \helpref{wxGrid::SetTable}{wxgridsettable}).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::AppendCols}\label{wxgridappendcols}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{AppendCols}{\param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{AppendCols}{\param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Appends one or more new columns to the right of the grid and returns TRUE if
|
||||
Appends one or more new columns to the right of the grid and returns true if
|
||||
successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
|
||||
|
||||
If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
|
||||
@ -128,9 +128,9 @@ If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::AppendRows}\label{wxgridappendrows}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{AppendRows}{\param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{AppendRows}{\param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Appends one or more new rows to the bottom of the grid and returns TRUE if
|
||||
Appends one or more new rows to the bottom of the grid and returns true if
|
||||
successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
|
||||
|
||||
If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
|
||||
@ -149,9 +149,9 @@ The memory requirements for this could become prohibitive if your grid is very l
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::AutoSizeColumn}\label{wxgridautosizecolumn}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{AutoSizeColumn}{\param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{AutoSizeColumn}{\param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated width will
|
||||
Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated width will
|
||||
also be set as the minimal width for the column.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Note}\\
|
||||
@ -160,9 +160,9 @@ The memory requirements for this could become prohibitive if your grid is very l
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::AutoSizeColumns}\label{wxgridautosizecolumns}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{AutoSizeColumns}{\param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{AutoSizeColumns}{\param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Automatically sizes all columns to fit their contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated widths will
|
||||
Automatically sizes all columns to fit their contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated widths will
|
||||
also be set as the minimal widths for the columns.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Note}\\
|
||||
@ -171,9 +171,9 @@ The memory requirements for this could become prohibitive if your grid is very l
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::AutoSizeRow}\label{wxgridautosizerow}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{AutoSizeRow}{\param{int }{row}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{AutoSizeRow}{\param{int }{row}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Automatically sizes the row to fit its contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated height will
|
||||
Automatically sizes the row to fit its contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated height will
|
||||
also be set as the minimal height for the row.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Note}\\
|
||||
@ -182,9 +182,9 @@ The memory requirements for this could become prohibitive if your grid is very l
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::AutoSizeRows}\label{wxgridautosizerows}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{AutoSizeRows}{\param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{AutoSizeRows}{\param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Automatically sizes all rows to fit their contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated heights will
|
||||
Automatically sizes all rows to fit their contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated heights will
|
||||
also be set as the minimal heights for the rows.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Note}\\
|
||||
@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ screen flicker. The final EndBatch will cause the grid to be repainted.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CanDragColSize}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if columns can be resized by dragging with the mouse. Columns can be resized
|
||||
Returns true if columns can be resized by dragging with the mouse. Columns can be resized
|
||||
by dragging the edges of their labels. If grid line dragging is enabled they can also be
|
||||
resized by dragging the right edge of the column in the grid cell area
|
||||
(see \helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize}{wxgridenabledraggridsize}).
|
||||
@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ resized by dragging the right edge of the column in the grid cell area
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CanDragRowSize}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if rows can be resized by dragging with the mouse. Rows can be resized
|
||||
Returns true if rows can be resized by dragging with the mouse. Rows can be resized
|
||||
by dragging the edges of their labels. If grid line dragging is enabled they can also be
|
||||
resized by dragging the lower edge of the row in the grid cell area
|
||||
(see \helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize}{wxgridenabledraggridsize}).
|
||||
@ -223,14 +223,14 @@ resized by dragging the lower edge of the row in the grid cell area
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CanDragGridSize}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Return TRUE if the dragging of grid lines to resize rows and columns is enabled or FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Return true if the dragging of grid lines to resize rows and columns is enabled or false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::CanEnableCellControl}\label{wxgridcanenablecellcontrol}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{CanEnableCellControl}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the in-place edit control for the current grid cell can be used and
|
||||
FALSE otherwise (e.g. if the current cell is read-only).
|
||||
Returns true if the in-place edit control for the current grid cell can be used and
|
||||
false otherwise (e.g. if the current cell is read-only).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::CellToRect}\label{wxgridcelltorect}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -270,10 +270,10 @@ class and pass a table object to the grid with \helpref{wxGrid::SetTable}{wxgrid
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::DeleteCols}\label{wxgriddeletecols}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{DeleteCols}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{DeleteCols}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Deletes one or more columns from a grid starting at the specified position and returns
|
||||
TRUE if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
|
||||
true if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
|
||||
|
||||
If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
|
||||
\helpref{wxGridTableBase::DeleteCols}{wxgridtablebasedeletecols}. See
|
||||
@ -281,10 +281,10 @@ If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::DeleteRows}\label{wxgriddeleterows}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{DeleteRows}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{DeleteRows}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Deletes one or more rows from a grid starting at the specified position and returns
|
||||
TRUE if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
|
||||
true if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
|
||||
|
||||
If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
|
||||
\helpref{wxGridTableBase::DeleteRows}{wxgridtablebasedeleterows}. See
|
||||
@ -295,13 +295,13 @@ If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
|
||||
\func{void}{DisableCellEditControl}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Disables in-place editing of grid cells.
|
||||
Equivalent to calling EnableCellEditControl(FALSE).
|
||||
Equivalent to calling EnableCellEditControl(false).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::DisableDragColSize}\label{wxgriddisabledragcolsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{DisableDragColSize}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Disables column sizing by dragging with the mouse. Equivalent to passing FALSE to
|
||||
Disables column sizing by dragging with the mouse. Equivalent to passing false to
|
||||
\helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragColSize}{wxgridenabledragcolsize}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::DisableDragGridSize}\label{wxgriddisabledraggridsize}
|
||||
@ -309,37 +309,37 @@ Disables column sizing by dragging with the mouse. Equivalent to passing FALSE t
|
||||
\func{void}{DisableDragGridSize}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Disable mouse dragging of grid lines to resize rows and columns. Equivalent to passing
|
||||
FALSE to \helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize}{wxgridenabledraggridsize}
|
||||
false to \helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize}{wxgridenabledraggridsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::DisableDragRowSize}\label{wxgriddisabledragrowsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{DisableDragRowSize}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Disables row sizing by dragging with the mouse. Equivalent to passing FALSE to
|
||||
Disables row sizing by dragging with the mouse. Equivalent to passing false to
|
||||
\helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragRowSize}{wxgridenabledragrowsize}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::EnableCellEditControl}\label{wxgridenablecelleditcontrol}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableCellEditControl}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableCellEditControl}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Enables or disables in-place editing of grid cell data. The grid will issue either a
|
||||
wxEVT\_GRID\_EDITOR\_SHOWN or wxEVT\_GRID\_EDITOR\_HIDDEN event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::EnableDragColSize}\label{wxgridenabledragcolsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableDragColSize}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableDragColSize}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Enables or disables column sizing by dragging with the mouse.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize}\label{wxgridenabledraggridsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableDragGridSize}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableDragGridSize}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Enables or disables row and column resizing by dragging gridlines with the mouse.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::EnableDragRowSize}\label{wxgridenabledragrowsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableDragRowSize}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableDragRowSize}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Enables or disables row sizing by dragging with the mouse.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -347,8 +347,8 @@ Enables or disables row sizing by dragging with the mouse.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableEditing}{\param{bool }{edit}}
|
||||
|
||||
If the edit argument is FALSE this function sets the whole grid as read-only. If the
|
||||
argument is TRUE the grid is set to the default state where cells may be editable. In the
|
||||
If the edit argument is false this function sets the whole grid as read-only. If the
|
||||
argument is true the grid is set to the default state where cells may be editable. In the
|
||||
default state you can set single grid cells and whole rows and columns to be editable or
|
||||
read-only via
|
||||
\helpref{wxGridCellAttribute::SetReadOnly}{wxgridcellattrsetreadonly}. For single
|
||||
@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ For more information about controlling grid cell attributes see the
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::EnableGridLines}\label{wxgridenablegridlines}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableGridLines}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableGridLines}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Turns the drawing of grid lines on or off.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ Returns the colour used for grid lines.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GridLinesEnabled}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if drawing of grid lines is turned on, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if drawing of grid lines is turned on, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::GetLabelBackgroundColour}\label{wxgridgetlabelbackgroundcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -699,10 +699,10 @@ Hides the in-place cell edit control.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::InsertCols}\label{wxgridinsertcols}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{InsertCols}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{InsertCols}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Inserts one or more new columns into a grid with the first new column at the
|
||||
specified position and returns TRUE if successful. The updateLabels argument is not
|
||||
specified position and returns true if successful. The updateLabels argument is not
|
||||
used at present.
|
||||
|
||||
The sequence of actions begins with the grid object requesting the underlying grid
|
||||
@ -716,10 +716,10 @@ table class.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::InsertRows}\label{wxgridinsertrows}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{InsertRows}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{InsertRows}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Inserts one or more new rows into a grid with the first new row at the specified
|
||||
position and returns TRUE if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at
|
||||
position and returns true if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at
|
||||
present.
|
||||
|
||||
The sequence of actions begins with the grid object requesting the underlying grid
|
||||
@ -735,20 +735,20 @@ table class.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsCellEditControlEnabled}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the in-place edit control is currently enabled.
|
||||
Returns true if the in-place edit control is currently enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::IsCurrentCellReadOnly}\label{wxgridiscurrentcellreadonly}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsCurrentCellReadOnly}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the current cell has been set to read-only
|
||||
Returns true if the current cell has been set to read-only
|
||||
(see \helpref{wxGrid::SetReadOnly}{wxgridsetreadonly}).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::IsEditable}\label{wxgridiseditable}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsEditable}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE if the whole grid has been set as read-only or TRUE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns false if the whole grid has been set as read-only or true otherwise.
|
||||
See \helpref{wxGrid::EnableEditing}{wxgridenableediting} for more information about
|
||||
controlling the editing status of grid cells.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -764,22 +764,22 @@ Is this cell currently selected.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsReadOnly}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the cell at the specified location can't be edited.
|
||||
Returns true if the cell at the specified location can't be edited.
|
||||
See also \helpref{wxGrid::IsReadOnly}{wxgridisreadonly}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::IsSelection}\label{wxgridisselection}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsSelection}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if there are currently rows, columns or blocks of cells selected.
|
||||
Returns true if there are currently rows, columns or blocks of cells selected.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::IsVisible}\label{wxgridisvisible}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsVisible}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{wholeCellVisible = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsVisible}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{wholeCellVisible = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsVisible}{\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{coords}, \param{bool }{wholeCellVisible = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsVisible}{\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{coords}, \param{bool }{wholeCellVisible = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if a cell is either wholly visible (the default) or at least partially
|
||||
Returns true if a cell is either wholly visible (the default) or at least partially
|
||||
visible in the grid window.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::MakeCellVisible}\label{wxgridmakecellvisible}
|
||||
@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ nothing if the cell is already visible.
|
||||
\func{bool}{MoveCursorDown}{\param{bool }{expandSelection}}
|
||||
|
||||
Moves the grid cursor down by one row. If a block of cells was previously selected it
|
||||
will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
|
||||
will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
|
||||
This function is called for Down cursor key presses or Shift+Down to expand a selection.
|
||||
@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ This function is called for Down cursor key presses or Shift+Down to expand a se
|
||||
\func{bool}{MoveCursorLeft}{\param{bool }{expandSelection}}
|
||||
|
||||
Moves the grid cursor left by one column. If a block of cells was previously selected it
|
||||
will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
|
||||
will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
|
||||
This function is called for Left cursor key presses or Shift+Left to expand a selection.
|
||||
@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ This function is called for Left cursor key presses or Shift+Left to expand a se
|
||||
\func{bool}{MoveCursorRight}{\param{bool }{expandSelection}}
|
||||
|
||||
Moves the grid cursor right by one column. If a block of cells was previously selected it
|
||||
will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
|
||||
will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
|
||||
This function is called for Right cursor key presses or Shift+Right to expand a selection.
|
||||
@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ This function is called for Right cursor key presses or Shift+Right to expand a
|
||||
\func{bool}{MoveCursorUp}{\param{bool }{expandSelection}}
|
||||
|
||||
Moves the grid cursor up by one row. If a block of cells was previously selected it
|
||||
will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
|
||||
will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
|
||||
This function is called for Up cursor key presses or Shift+Up to expand a selection.
|
||||
@ -837,7 +837,7 @@ This function is called for Up cursor key presses or Shift+Up to expand a select
|
||||
|
||||
Moves the grid cursor down in the current column such that it skips to the beginning or
|
||||
end of a block of non-empty cells. If a block of cells was previously selected it
|
||||
will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
|
||||
will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
|
||||
This function is called for the Ctrl+Down key combination. Shift+Ctrl+Down expands a selection.
|
||||
@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ This function is called for the Ctrl+Down key combination. Shift+Ctrl+Down expan
|
||||
|
||||
Moves the grid cursor left in the current row such that it skips to the beginning or
|
||||
end of a block of non-empty cells. If a block of cells was previously selected it
|
||||
will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
|
||||
will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
|
||||
This function is called for the Ctrl+Left key combination. Shift+Ctrl+left expands a selection.
|
||||
@ -859,7 +859,7 @@ This function is called for the Ctrl+Left key combination. Shift+Ctrl+left expan
|
||||
|
||||
Moves the grid cursor right in the current row such that it skips to the beginning or
|
||||
end of a block of non-empty cells. If a block of cells was previously selected it
|
||||
will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
|
||||
will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
|
||||
This function is called for the Ctrl+Right key combination. Shift+Ctrl+Right expands a selection.
|
||||
@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ This function is called for the Ctrl+Right key combination. Shift+Ctrl+Right exp
|
||||
|
||||
Moves the grid cursor up in the current column such that it skips to the beginning or
|
||||
end of a block of non-empty cells. If a block of cells was previously selected it
|
||||
will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
|
||||
will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
|
||||
This function is called for the Ctrl+Up key combination. Shift+Ctrl+Up expands a selection.
|
||||
@ -913,27 +913,27 @@ Selects all cells in the grid.
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SelectBlock}\label{wxgridselectblock}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SelectBlock}{\param{int }{topRow}, \param{int }{leftCol},
|
||||
\param{int }{bottomRow}, \param{int }{rightCol}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{int }{bottomRow}, \param{int }{rightCol}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SelectBlock}{\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{topLeft},
|
||||
\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{bottomRight}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{bottomRight}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Selects a rectangular block of cells. If addToSelected is FALSE then any existing selection will be
|
||||
deselected; if TRUE the column will be added to the existing selection.
|
||||
Selects a rectangular block of cells. If addToSelected is false then any existing selection will be
|
||||
deselected; if true the column will be added to the existing selection.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SelectCol}\label{wxgridselectcol}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SelectCol}{\param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SelectCol}{\param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Selects the specified column. If addToSelected is FALSE then any existing selection will be
|
||||
deselected; if TRUE the column will be added to the existing selection.
|
||||
Selects the specified column. If addToSelected is false then any existing selection will be
|
||||
deselected; if true the column will be added to the existing selection.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SelectRow}\label{wxgridselectrow}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SelectRow}{\param{int }{row}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SelectRow}{\param{int }{row}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Selects the specified row. If addToSelected is FALSE then any existing selection will be
|
||||
deselected; if TRUE the row will be added to the existing selection.
|
||||
Selects the specified row. If addToSelected is false then any existing selection will be
|
||||
deselected; if true the row will be added to the existing selection.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetCellAlignment}\label{wxgridsetcellalignment}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ Sets the width of the specified column.
|
||||
This function does not refresh the grid. If you are calling it outside of a BeginBatch / EndBatch
|
||||
block you can use \helpref{wxGrid::ForceRefresh}{wxgridforcerefresh} to see the changes.
|
||||
|
||||
Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated width will
|
||||
Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated width will
|
||||
also be set as the minimal width for the column.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Note}\\
|
||||
@ -1130,17 +1130,17 @@ the \helpref{wxGrid overview}{gridoverview} for more information about cell edit
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetDefaultColSize}\label{wxgridsetdefaultcolsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetDefaultColSize}{\param{int }{width}, \param{bool }{resizeExistingCols = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetDefaultColSize}{\param{int }{width}, \param{bool }{resizeExistingCols = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the default width for columns in the grid. This will only affect columns subsequently added to
|
||||
the grid unless resizeExistingCols is TRUE.
|
||||
the grid unless resizeExistingCols is true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetDefaultRowSize}\label{wxgridsetdefaultrowsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetDefaultRowSize}{\param{int }{height}, \param{bool }{resizeExistingRows = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetDefaultRowSize}{\param{int }{height}, \param{bool }{resizeExistingRows = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the default height for rows in the grid. This will only affect rows subsequently added
|
||||
to the grid unless resizeExistingRows is TRUE.
|
||||
to the grid unless resizeExistingRows is true.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetGridCursor}\label{wxgridsetgridcursor}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1175,7 +1175,7 @@ Sets the colour for row and column label text.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetReadOnly}\label{wxgridsetreadonly}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetReadOnly}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{isReadOnly = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetReadOnly}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{isReadOnly = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Makes the cell at the specified location read-only or editable.
|
||||
See also \helpref{wxGrid::IsReadOnly}{wxgridisreadonly}.
|
||||
@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ Sets the height of the specified row.
|
||||
This function does not refresh the grid. If you are calling it outside of a BeginBatch / EndBatch
|
||||
block you can use \helpref{wxGrid::ForceRefresh}{wxgridforcerefresh} to see the changes.
|
||||
|
||||
Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated width will
|
||||
Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated width will
|
||||
also be set as the minimal width for the column.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Note}
|
||||
@ -1252,11 +1252,11 @@ Set the selection behaviour of the grid.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetTable}\label{wxgridsettable}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{SetTable}{\param{wxGridTableBase* }{table}, \param{bool }{takeOwnership = FALSE}, \param{wxGrid::wxGridSelectionModes }{selmode = wxGrid::wxGridSelectCells}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{SetTable}{\param{wxGridTableBase* }{table}, \param{bool }{takeOwnership = false}, \param{wxGrid::wxGridSelectionModes }{selmode = wxGrid::wxGridSelectCells}}
|
||||
|
||||
Passes a pointer to a custom grid table to be used by the grid. This should be called
|
||||
after the grid constructor and before using the grid object. If takeOwnership is set to
|
||||
TRUE then the table will be deleted by the wxGrid destructor.
|
||||
true then the table will be deleted by the wxGrid destructor.
|
||||
|
||||
Use this function instead of \helpref{wxGrid::CreateGrid}{wxgridcreategrid} when your
|
||||
application involves complex or non-string data or data sets that are too large to fit
|
||||
@ -1521,7 +1521,7 @@ Returned number of whole cols visible.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetEditable}\label{wxgridseteditable}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetEditable}{\param{bool }{edit = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetEditable}{\param{bool }{edit = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::GetEditInPlace}\label{wxgridgeteditinplace}
|
||||
@ -1531,7 +1531,7 @@ Returned number of whole cols visible.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetEditInPlace}\label{wxgridseteditinplace}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetEditInPlace}{\param{bool }{edit = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetEditInPlace}{\param{bool }{edit = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetCellBitmap}\label{wxgridsetcellbitmap}
|
||||
@ -1614,13 +1614,13 @@ This function must be public for compatibility.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetOrCalcColumnSizes}\label{wxgridsetorcalccolumnsizes}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{SetOrCalcColumnSizes}{\param{bool }{calcOnly}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{int}{SetOrCalcColumnSizes}{\param{bool }{calcOnly}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Common part of AutoSizeColumn/Row() and GetBestSize()
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::SetOrCalcRowSizes}\label{wxgridsetorcalcrowsizes}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{SetOrCalcRowSizes}{\param{bool }{calcOnly}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{int}{SetOrCalcRowSizes}{\param{bool }{calcOnly}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGrid::AutoSizeColOrRow}\label{wxgridautosizecolorrow}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Sets the alignment.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetReadOnly}\label{wxgridcellattrsetreadonly}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetReadOnly}{\param{bool }{isReadOnly = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetReadOnly}{\param{bool }{isReadOnly = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetRenderer}\label{wxgridcellattrsetrenderer}
|
||||
|
@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ The editor for string data allowing to choose from a list of strings.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellChoiceEditor::wxGridCellChoiceEditor}\label{wxgridcellchoiceeditorconstr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridCellChoiceEditor}{\param{size\_t }{count = 0}, \param{const wxString }{choices[] = NULL}, \param{bool }{allowOthers = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridCellChoiceEditor}{\param{size\_t }{count = 0}, \param{const wxString }{choices[] = NULL}, \param{bool }{allowOthers = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{count}{Number of strings from which the user can choose.}
|
||||
\docparam{choices}{An array of strings from which the user can choose.}
|
||||
\docparam{allowOthers}{If allowOthers if TRUE, the user can type a string not in choices array.}
|
||||
\docparam{allowOthers}{If allowOthers if true, the user can type a string not in choices array.}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellChoiceEditor::SetParameters}\label{wxgridcellchoiceeditorsetparameters}
|
||||
|
@ -92,8 +92,8 @@ Default constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridEvent}{\param{int }{id}, \param{wxEventType }{type}, \param{wxObject* }{obj},
|
||||
\param{int }{row = -1}, \param{int }{col = -1}, \param{int }{x = -1}, \param{int }{y = -1},
|
||||
\param{bool }{sel = TRUE}, \param{bool }{control = FALSE}, \param{bool }{shift = FALSE},
|
||||
\param{bool }{alt = FALSE}, \param{bool }{meta = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{bool }{sel = true}, \param{bool }{control = false}, \param{bool }{shift = false},
|
||||
\param{bool }{alt = false}, \param{bool }{meta = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ Default constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{AltDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridEvent::ControlDown}\label{wxgrideventcontroldown}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{ControlDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridEvent::GetCol}\label{wxgrideventgetcol}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -131,20 +131,20 @@ Row at which the event occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{MetaDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridEvent::Selecting}\label{wxgrideventselecting}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Selecting}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the user deselected a cell, FALSE if the user
|
||||
Returns true if the user deselected a cell, false if the user
|
||||
deselected a cell.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridEvent::ShiftDown}\label{wxgrideventshiftdown}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{ShiftDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxGridRangeSelectEvent}}\label{wxgridrangeselectevent}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -175,21 +175,21 @@ Default constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridRangeSelectEvent}{\param{int }{id}, \param{wxEventType }{type},
|
||||
\param{wxObject* }{obj}, \param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{topLeft},
|
||||
\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{bottomRight}, \param{bool }{sel = TRUE},
|
||||
\param{bool }{control = FALSE}, \param{bool }{shift = FALSE}, \param{bool }{alt = FALSE},
|
||||
\param{bool }{meta = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{bottomRight}, \param{bool }{sel = true},
|
||||
\param{bool }{control = false}, \param{bool }{shift = false}, \param{bool }{alt = false},
|
||||
\param{bool }{meta = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridRangeSelectEvent::AltDown}\label{wxgridrangeselecteventaltdown}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{AltDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridRangeSelectEvent::ControlDown}\label{wxgridrangeselecteventcontroldown}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{ControlDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridRangeSelectEvent::GetBottomRightCoords}\label{wxgridrangeselecteventgetbottomrightcoords}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -231,19 +231,19 @@ Top row of the rectangular area that was (de)selected.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{MetaDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridRangeSelectEvent::Selecting}\label{wxgridrangeselecteventselecting}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Selecting}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the area was selected, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the area was selected, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridRangeSelectEvent::ShiftDown}\label{wxgridrangeselecteventshiftdown}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{ShiftDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxGridSizeEvent}}\label{wxgridsizeevent}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -281,20 +281,20 @@ Default constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridSizeEvent}{\param{int }{id}, \param{wxEventType }{type},
|
||||
\param{wxObject* }{obj}, \param{int }{rowOrCol = -1}, \param{int }{x = -1},
|
||||
\param{int }{y = -1}, \param{bool }{control = FALSE}, \param{bool }{shift = FALSE},
|
||||
\param{bool }{alt = FALSE}, \param{bool }{meta = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{int }{y = -1}, \param{bool }{control = false}, \param{bool }{shift = false},
|
||||
\param{bool }{alt = false}, \param{bool }{meta = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridSizeEvent::AltDown}\label{wxgridsizeeventaltdown}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{AltDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridSizeEvent::ControlDown}\label{wxgridsizeeventcontroldown}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{ControlDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridSizeEvent::GetPosition}\label{wxgridsizeeventgetposition}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -312,11 +312,11 @@ Row or column at that was resized.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{MetaDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridSizeEvent::ShiftDown}\label{wxgridsizeeventshiftdown}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{ShiftDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
Returns true if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Deletes entry in hash table and returns the user's data (if found).
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{DeleteContents}{\param{bool}{ flag}}
|
||||
|
||||
If set to TRUE data stored in hash table will be deleted when hash table object
|
||||
If set to true data stored in hash table will be deleted when hash table object
|
||||
is destroyed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ This function can actually return 0 or 1.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{empty}{}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the hash map does not contain any element, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the hash map does not contain any element, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHashMap::end}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ function that takes a wxHelpEvent argument.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHelpEvent::wxHelpEvent}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxHelpEvent}{\param{WXTYPE }{eventType = 0}, \param{bool}{ active = TRUE}, \param{wxWindowID }{id = 0},
|
||||
\func{}{wxHelpEvent}{\param{WXTYPE }{eventType = 0}, \param{bool}{ active = true}, \param{wxWindowID }{id = 0},
|
||||
\param{const wxPoint\& }{point}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ contents.
|
||||
|
||||
Displays the section as a popup window using a context id.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE if unsuccessful or not implemented.
|
||||
Returns false if unsuccessful or not implemented.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHelpController::DisplaySection}\label{wxhelpcontrollerdisplaysection}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ See also the help sample for notes on how to specify section numbers for various
|
||||
|
||||
Displays the text in a popup window, if possible.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE if unsuccessful or not implemented.
|
||||
Returns false if unsuccessful or not implemented.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHelpController::GetFrameParameters}\label{wxhelpcontrollergetframeparameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ This does not work for all help controllers.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual void}{SetFrameParameters}{\param{const wxString \& }{title},
|
||||
\param{const wxSize \& }{size}, \param{const wxPoint \& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition},
|
||||
\param{bool }{newFrameEachTime = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{bool }{newFrameEachTime = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
For wxHtmlHelpController, the title is set (again with \%s indicating the
|
||||
page title) and also the size and position of the frame if the frame is already
|
||||
|
@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ the window.
|
||||
Shows help for the given window. Uses \helpref{GetHelp}{wxhelpprovidergethelp} internally if
|
||||
applicable.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if it was done, or FALSE if no help was available
|
||||
Returns true if it was done, or false if no help was available
|
||||
for this window.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHelpProvider::AddHelp}\label{wxhelpprovideraddhelp}
|
||||
|
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ should not be crossed by words, images etc.). If this cell cannot be divided
|
||||
into two pieces (each one on another page) then it moves the pagebreak
|
||||
few pixels up.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if pagebreak was modified, FALSE otherwise
|
||||
Returns true if pagebreak was modified, false otherwise
|
||||
|
||||
Usage:
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
@ -224,8 +224,8 @@ you should use wxHtmlBinderCell instead.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{x, y}{coordinates of mouse click (this is relative to cell's origin}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{left, middle, right}{boolean flags for mouse buttons. TRUE if the left/middle/right
|
||||
button is pressed, FALSE otherwise}
|
||||
\docparam{left, middle, right}{boolean flags for mouse buttons. true if the left/middle/right
|
||||
button is pressed, false otherwise}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlCell::SetId}\label{wxhtmlcellsetid}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ width of the rectangle between calls to \helpref{Render}{wxhtmldcrendererrender}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::SetHtmlText}\label{wxhtmldcrenderersethtmltext}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetHtmlText}{\param{const wxString\& }{html}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{isdir = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetHtmlText}{\param{const wxString\& }{html}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{isdir = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Assign text to the renderer. \helpref{Render}{wxhtmldcrendererrender} then draws
|
||||
the text onto DC.
|
||||
@ -68,12 +68,12 @@ the text onto DC.
|
||||
\docparam{basepath}{base directory (html string would be stored there if it was in
|
||||
file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{isdir}{FALSE if basepath is filename, TRUE if it is directory name
|
||||
\docparam{isdir}{false if basepath is filename, true if it is directory name
|
||||
(see \helpref{wxFileSystem}{wxfilesystem} for detailed explanation)}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::Render}\label{wxhtmldcrendererrender}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{Render}{\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}, \param{int }{from = 0}, \param{int }{dont\_render = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{int}{Render}{\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}, \param{int }{from = 0}, \param{int }{dont\_render = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Renders HTML text to the DC.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Renders HTML text to the DC.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{from}{y-coordinate of the very first visible cell}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{dont\_render}{if TRUE then this method only returns y coordinate of the next page
|
||||
\docparam{dont\_render}{if true then this method only returns y coordinate of the next page
|
||||
and does not output anything}
|
||||
|
||||
Returned value is y coordinate of first cell than didn't fit onto page.
|
||||
|
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
Preview HTML file.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
|
||||
Returns false in case of error -- call
|
||||
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
|
||||
information about the kind of the error.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ information about the kind of the error.
|
||||
|
||||
Preview HTML text (not file!).
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
|
||||
Returns false in case of error -- call
|
||||
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
|
||||
information about the kind of the error.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
|
||||
|
||||
Print HTML file.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
|
||||
Returns false in case of error -- call
|
||||
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
|
||||
information about the kind of the error.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ information about the kind of the error.
|
||||
|
||||
Print HTML text (not file!).
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
|
||||
Returns false in case of error -- call
|
||||
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
|
||||
information about the kind of the error.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CanRead}{\param{const wxFSFile\& }{file}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if this filter is capable of reading file {\it file}.
|
||||
Returns true if this filter is capable of reading file {\it file}.
|
||||
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ is possible and, in fact, recommended way.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{show\_wait\_msg}{If TRUE then a decoration-less window with progress message is displayed.}
|
||||
\docparam{show\_wait\_msg}{If true then a decoration-less window with progress message is displayed.}
|
||||
\docparam{book\_file}{Help book filename. It is recommended to use this prototype
|
||||
instead of the one taking URL, because it is less error-prone.}
|
||||
\docparam{book\_url}{Help book URL (note that syntax of filename and URL is
|
||||
@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Displays help window and focuses index panel.
|
||||
\func{bool}{KeywordSearch}{\param{const wxString\& }{keyword}}
|
||||
|
||||
Displays help window, focuses search panel and starts searching.
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the keyword was found.
|
||||
Returns true if the keyword was found.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf Important:} KeywordSearch searches only pages listed in .hhc file(s).
|
||||
You should list all pages in the contents file.
|
||||
|
@ -62,13 +62,13 @@ for parameters description.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::CreateContents}\label{wxhtmlhelpframecreatecontents}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{CreateContents}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{CreateContents}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates contents panel. (May take some time.)
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::CreateIndex}\label{wxhtmlhelpframecreateindex}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{CreateIndex}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{CreateIndex}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates index panel. (May take some time.)
|
||||
|
||||
@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Reads user's settings for this frame (see \helpref{wxHtmlHelpController::ReadCus
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::RefreshLists}\label{wxhtmlhelpframerefreshlists}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{RefreshLists}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{RefreshLists}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Refresh all panels. This is necessary if a new book was added.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ any virtual file system or it may be normal file.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlPrintout::SetHtmlText}\label{wxhtmlprintoutsethtmltext}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetHtmlText}{\param{const wxString\& }{html}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{isdir = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetHtmlText}{\param{const wxString\& }{html}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{isdir = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Prepare the class for printing this HTML text.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Prepare the class for printing this HTML text.
|
||||
\docparam{basepath}{base directory (html string would be stored there if it was in
|
||||
file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{isdir}{FALSE if basepath is filename, TRUE if it is directory name
|
||||
\docparam{isdir}{false if basepath is filename, true if it is directory name
|
||||
(see \helpref{wxFileSystem}{wxfilesystem} for detailed explanation)}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ and name of {\tt </table>} is "TABLE")
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetParam}\label{wxhtmltaggetparam}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxString}{GetParam}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}, \param{bool }{with\_commas = FALSE}}
|
||||
\constfunc{wxString}{GetParam}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}, \param{bool }{with\_commas = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the value of the parameter. You should check whether the
|
||||
parameter exists or not (use \helpref{HasParam}{wxhtmltaghasparam}) first.
|
||||
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ parameter exists or not (use \helpref{HasParam}{wxhtmltaghasparam}) first.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{par}{The parameter's name.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{with\_commas}{TRUE if you want to get commas as well. See example.}
|
||||
\docparam{with\_commas}{true if you want to get commas as well. See example.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Example}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ dummy = tag.GetParam("SIZE");
|
||||
// dummy == "+2"
|
||||
dummy = tag.GetParam("COLOR");
|
||||
// dummy == "#0000FF"
|
||||
dummy = tag.GetParam("COLOR", TRUE);
|
||||
dummy = tag.GetParam("COLOR", true);
|
||||
// dummy == "\"#0000FF\"" -- see the difference!!
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ dummy = tag.GetParam("COLOR", TRUE);
|
||||
Interprets tag parameter {\it par} as colour specification and saves its value
|
||||
into wxColour variable pointed by {\it clr}.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE on success and FALSE if {\it par} is not colour specification or
|
||||
Returns true on success and false if {\it par} is not colour specification or
|
||||
if the tag has no such parameter.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetParamAsInt}\label{wxhtmltaggetparamasint}
|
||||
@ -130,14 +130,14 @@ if the tag has no such parameter.
|
||||
Interprets tag parameter {\it par} as an integer and saves its value
|
||||
into int variable pointed by {\it value}.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE on success and FALSE if {\it par} is not an integer or
|
||||
Returns true on success and false if {\it par} is not an integer or
|
||||
if the tag has no such parameter.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlTag::HasEnding}\label{wxhtmltaghasending}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasEnding}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if this tag is paired with ending tag, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if this tag is paired with ending tag, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
See the example of HTML document:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ is ending itself) of course doesn't have ending tag.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasParam}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the tag has a parameter of the given name.
|
||||
Returns true if the tag has a parameter of the given name.
|
||||
Example : {\tt <FONT SIZE=+2 COLOR="\#FF00FF">} has two parameters named
|
||||
"SIZE" and "COLOR".
|
||||
|
||||
@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Example : {\tt <FONT SIZE=+2 COLOR="\#FF00FF">} has two parameters named
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsEnding}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if this tag is ending one.
|
||||
Returns true if this tag is ending one.
|
||||
({\tt </FONT>} is ending tag, {\tt <FONT>} is not)
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlTag::ScanParam}\label{wxhtmltagscanparam}
|
||||
|
@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ info (see \helpref{wxHtmlTag}{wxhtmltag} for details).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if \helpref{ParseInner}{wxhtmltaghandlerparseinner} was called,
|
||||
FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if \helpref{ParseInner}{wxhtmltaghandlerparseinner} was called,
|
||||
false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Example}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Appends HTML fragment to currently displayed text and refreshes the window.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
FALSE if an error occurred, TRUE otherwise.
|
||||
false if an error occurred, true otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::GetInternalRepresentation}\label{wxhtmlwindowgetinternalrepresentation}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ htmlwin -> SetPage("help/myproject/index.htm");
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
FALSE if an error occurred, TRUE otherwise
|
||||
false if an error occurred, true otherwise
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::OnCellClicked}\label{wxhtmlwindowoncellclicked}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ If you want to load a document from some location use
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
FALSE if an error occurred, TRUE otherwise.
|
||||
false if an error occurred, true otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::SetRelatedFrame}\label{wxhtmlwindowsetrelatedframe}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ and \helpref{output encoding}{wxhtmlwinparsergetoutputencoding}.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetFontBold}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if actual font is bold, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if actual font is bold, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontFace}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontface}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -135,13 +135,13 @@ Returns actual font face name.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetFontFixed}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if actual font is fixed face, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if actual font is fixed face, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontItalic}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontitalic}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetFontItalic}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if actual font is italic, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if actual font is italic, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontSize}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontsize}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Returns actual font size (HTML size varies from -2 to +4)
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetFontUnderlined}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if actual font is underlined, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if actual font is underlined, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetInputEncoding}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetinputencoding}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ inch wide on typical printer. With pixel\_scale = 3.0 it would be 3 inches.)
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFontBold}{\param{int }{x}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets bold flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either TRUE of FALSE.
|
||||
Sets bold flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontFace}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontface}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -247,13 +247,13 @@ inside {\tt <TT>} tag or not).
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFontFixed}{\param{int }{x}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets fixed face flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either TRUE of FALSE.
|
||||
Sets fixed face flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontItalic}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontitalic}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFontItalic}{\param{int }{x}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets italic flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either TRUE of FALSE.
|
||||
Sets italic flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontSize}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontsize}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Sets actual font size (HTML size varies from 1 to 7)
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFontUnderlined}{\param{int }{x}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets underlined flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either TRUE of FALSE.
|
||||
Sets underlined flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFonts}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfonts}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -105,15 +105,15 @@ As mentioned above, wxApp::OnInit() is called upon startup and should be
|
||||
used to initialize the program, maybe showing a "splash screen" and creating
|
||||
the main window (or several). The frame should get a title bar text ("Hello World")
|
||||
and a position and start-up size. One frame can also be declared to be the
|
||||
top window. Returning TRUE indicates a successful initialization.
|
||||
top window. Returning true indicates a successful initialization.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
bool MyApp::OnInit()
|
||||
{
|
||||
MyFrame *frame = new MyFrame( "Hello World", wxPoint(50,50), wxSize(450,340) );
|
||||
frame->Show( TRUE );
|
||||
frame->Show( true );
|
||||
SetTopWindow( frame );
|
||||
return TRUE;
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -142,14 +142,14 @@ MyFrame::MyFrame(const wxString& title, const wxPoint& pos, const wxSize& size)
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
Here are the actual event handlers. MyFrame::OnQuit() closes the main window
|
||||
by calling Close(). The parameter TRUE indicates that other windows have no veto
|
||||
by calling Close(). The parameter true indicates that other windows have no veto
|
||||
power such as after asking "Do you really want to close?". If there is no other
|
||||
main window left, the application will quit.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
void MyFrame::OnQuit(wxCommandEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
|
||||
{
|
||||
Close( TRUE );
|
||||
Close( true );
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ The validity of these flags depends on the platform and wxWindows configuration.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if icon data is present.
|
||||
Returns true if icon data is present.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{comment}
|
||||
\membersection{wxIcon::SaveFile}\label{wxiconsavefile}
|
||||
@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ The validity of these flags depends on the platform and wxWindows configuration.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ equal (a fast test).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the icons were effectively equal, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the icons were effectively equal, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxIcon::operator $!=$}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -398,6 +398,6 @@ unequal (a fast test).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the icons were unequal, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the icons were unequal, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ member function that takes a wxIconizeEvent argument.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxIconizeEvent::wxIconizeEvent}\label{wxiconizeeventctor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxIconizeEvent}{\param{int }{id = 0}, \param{bool }{iconized = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{}{wxIconizeEvent}{\param{int }{id = 0}, \param{bool }{iconized = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -52,6 +52,6 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Iconized}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the frame has been iconized, {\tt FALSE} if it has been
|
||||
Returns {\tt true} if the frame has been iconized, {\tt false} if it has been
|
||||
restored.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxIdleEvent::RequestMore}\label{wxidleeventrequestmore}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{RequestMore}{\param{bool}{ needMore = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{RequestMore}{\param{bool}{ needMore = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Tells wxWindows that more processing is required. This function can be called by an OnIdle
|
||||
handler for a window or window event handler to indicate that wxApp::OnIdle should
|
||||
@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ new event is posted to the application by the windowing system.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{MoreRequested}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the OnIdle function processing this event requested more processing time.
|
||||
Returns true if the OnIdle function processing this event requested more processing time.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -81,10 +81,10 @@ and forth without loss in that respect.
|
||||
|
||||
Creates an image with the given width and height.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxImage}{\param{int}{ width}, \param{int}{ height}, \param{unsigned char*}{ data}, \param{bool}{ static\_data=FALSE}}
|
||||
\func{}{wxImage}{\param{int}{ width}, \param{int}{ height}, \param{unsigned char*}{ data}, \param{bool}{ static\_data=false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates an image from given data with the given width and height. If
|
||||
{\it static\_data} is TRUE, then wxImage will not delete the actual
|
||||
{\it static\_data} is true, then wxImage will not delete the actual
|
||||
image data in its destructor, otherwise it will free it by calling
|
||||
{\it free()}.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ of a given handler class in an application session.}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CanRead}{\param{const wxString\&}{ filename}}
|
||||
|
||||
returns TRUE if the current image handlers can read this file
|
||||
returns true if the current image handlers can read this file
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{In wxPython this static method is named {\tt wxImage\_AddHandler}.}
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::CleanUpHandlers}
|
||||
@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Creates a fresh image.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the call succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the call succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::Destroy}\label{wximagedestroy}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ order) by 1 until an unused colour is found or the colour space exhausted.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE if there is no unused colour left, TRUE on success.
|
||||
Returns false if there is no unused colour left, true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Notes}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Gets the width of the image in pixels.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasMask}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if there is a mask active, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if there is a mask active, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::GetOption}\label{wximagegetoption}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ Gets a user-defined option as an integer. The function is case-insensitive to {\
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasOption}{\param{const wxString\&}{ name}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the given option is present. The function is case-insensitive to {\it name}.
|
||||
Returns true if the given option is present. The function is case-insensitive to {\it name}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -596,8 +596,8 @@ hotspot for loaded cursor file:
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise. If the optional index parameter is out of range,
|
||||
FALSE is returned and a call to wxLogError() takes place.
|
||||
true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise. If the optional index parameter is out of range,
|
||||
false is returned and a call to wxLogError() takes place.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ mimetype from a file}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if image data is present.
|
||||
Returns true if image data is present.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::RemoveHandler}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ is not deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the handler was found and removed, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the handler was found and removed, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -689,7 +689,7 @@ Saves an image in the given stream.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ mimetype to the named file}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::Mirror}\label{wximagemirror}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxImage}{Mirror}{\param{bool}{ horizontally = TRUE}}
|
||||
\constfunc{wxImage}{Mirror}{\param{bool}{ horizontally = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a mirrored copy of the image. The parameter {\it horizontally}
|
||||
indicates the orientation.
|
||||
@ -755,9 +755,9 @@ Returns the (modified) image itself.
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::Rotate}\label{wximagerotate}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxImage}{Rotate}{\param{double}{ angle}, \param{const wxPoint\& }{rotationCentre},
|
||||
\param{bool}{ interpolating = TRUE}, \param{wxPoint*}{ offsetAfterRotation = NULL}}
|
||||
\param{bool}{ interpolating = true}, \param{wxPoint*}{ offsetAfterRotation = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Rotates the image about the given point, by {\it angle} radians. Passing TRUE
|
||||
Rotates the image about the given point, by {\it angle} radians. Passing true
|
||||
to {\it interpolating} results in better image quality, but is slower. If the
|
||||
image has a mask, then the mask colour is used for the uncovered pixels in the
|
||||
rotated image background. Else, black (rgb 0, 0, 0) will be used.
|
||||
@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ Returns the rotated image, leaving this image intact.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::Rotate90}\label{wximagerotate90}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxImage}{Rotate90}{\param{bool}{ clockwise = TRUE}}
|
||||
\constfunc{wxImage}{Rotate90}{\param{bool}{ clockwise = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a copy of the image rotated 90 degrees in the direction
|
||||
indicated by {\it clockwise}.
|
||||
@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ Do not pass to this function a pointer obtained through
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::SetMask}\label{wximagesetmask}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetMask}{\param{bool}{ hasMask = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetMask}{\param{bool}{ hasMask = true}}
|
||||
|
||||
Specifies whether there is a mask or not. The area of the mask is determined by the current mask colour.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -850,8 +850,8 @@ in {\it mask} has given RGB value.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE if {\it mask} does not have same dimensions as the image or if
|
||||
there is no unused colour left. Returns TRUE if the mask was successfully
|
||||
Returns false if {\it mask} does not have same dimensions as the image or if
|
||||
there is no unused colour left. Returns true if the mask was successfully
|
||||
applied.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Notes}
|
||||
@ -922,7 +922,7 @@ equal (a fast test).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the images were effectively equal, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the images were effectively equal, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::operator $!=$}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ unequal (a fast test).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the images were unequal, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
Returns true if the images were unequal, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxImageHandler}}\label{wximagehandler}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1024,7 +1024,7 @@ Gets the MIME type associated with this handler.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImageHandler::LoadFile}\label{wximagehandlerloadfile}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{LoadFile}{\param{wxImage* }{image}, \param{wxInputStream\&}{ stream}, \param{bool}{ verbose=TRUE}, \param{int}{ index=0}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{LoadFile}{\param{wxImage* }{image}, \param{wxInputStream\&}{ stream}, \param{bool}{ verbose=true}, \param{int}{ index=0}}
|
||||
|
||||
Loads a image from a stream, putting the resulting data into {\it image}. If the image file contains
|
||||
more than one image and the image handler is capable of retrieving these individually, {\it index}
|
||||
@ -1036,13 +1036,13 @@ indicates which image to read from the stream.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{stream}{Opened input stream for reading image data.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{verbose}{If set to TRUE, errors reported by the image handler will produce wxLogMessages.}
|
||||
\docparam{verbose}{If set to true, errors reported by the image handler will produce wxLogMessages.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{index}{The index of the image in the file (starting from zero).}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ Saves a image in the output stream.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ wxImageList is used principally in conjunction with \helpref{wxTreeCtrl}{wxtreec
|
||||
|
||||
Default constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxImageList}{\param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}, \param{const bool }{mask = TRUE},\rtfsp
|
||||
\func{}{wxImageList}{\param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}, \param{const bool }{mask = true},\rtfsp
|
||||
\param{int }{initialCount = 1}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor specifying the image size, whether image masks should be created, and the initial size of the list.
|
||||
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Constructor specifying the image size, whether image masks should be created, an
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{height}{Height of the images in the list.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{mask}{TRUE if masks should be created for all images.}
|
||||
\docparam{mask}{true if masks should be created for all images.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{initialCount}{The initial size of the list.}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ implements the following methods:\par
|
||||
}
|
||||
\membersection{wxImageList::Create}\label{wximagelistcreate}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}, \param{const bool }{mask = TRUE},\rtfsp
|
||||
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}, \param{const bool }{mask = true},\rtfsp
|
||||
\param{int }{initialCount = 1}}
|
||||
|
||||
Initializes the list. See \helpref{wxImageList::wxImageList}{wximagelistconstr} for details.
|
||||
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Initializes the list. See \helpref{wxImageList::wxImageList}{wximagelistconstr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Draw}{\param{int}{ index}, \param{wxDC\&}{ dc}, \param{int }{x},\rtfsp
|
||||
\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{flags = wxIMAGELIST\_DRAW\_NORMAL},\rtfsp
|
||||
\param{const bool }{solidBackground = FALSE}}
|
||||
\param{const bool }{solidBackground = false}}
|
||||
|
||||
Draws a specified image onto a device context.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ parameter is ignored as all images in the list have the same size.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the function succeeded, FALSE if it failed (for example, if the image
|
||||
true if the function succeeded, false if it failed (for example, if the image
|
||||
list was not yet initialized).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImageList::Remove}\label{wximagelistremove}
|
||||
@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Replaces the existing image with the new image.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the replacement was successful, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
true if the replacement was successful, false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
|
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More
Loading…
Reference in New Issue
Block a user